Ricoh Aficio MP 2550B Service Manual Download Page 402

Page: 402 / 1153

SP5xxx: Mode

D017/D018/D019/D020 5-138

1 Destination

Shows intended destination of the engine

board.

0: Japan

1: North America

2: Europe

3: Mainland China

4: Taiwan

2 SBCU ID

Displays the CPM information for the engine

board. For example, 25 (25 cpm), 30 (30

cpm), and so on.

3 IPU ID

Displays the IPU ID (presently fixed at “30”).

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 2550B

Page 1: ...D017 D018 D019 D020 SERVICE MANUAL 003320MIU ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...D017 D018 D019 D020 SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...D017 D018 D019 D020 SERVICE MANUAL 003320MIU ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...SION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is inte...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Americas Corporation WARNING ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...SAVIN D017 MP 2550B LD425B Aficio MP2550B 9025B D018 MP 2550SP LD425SP Aficio MP2550SP 9025SP D019 MP 3350B LD433B Aficio MP 3350B 9033B D020 MP 3350SP LD433SP Aficio MP 3350SP 9033bSP DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 01 2008 Original Printing ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...CKETS FOR PERIPHERALS 1 6 1 2 2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART 1 7 1 2 3 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 8 1 2 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 8 Tapes and Retainers 1 8 Developer 1 9 Re assembly 1 11 Toner Bottle 1 12 Emblem Decals 1 13 Completion 1 13 SP Settings 1 14 1 2 5 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE 1 15 1 3 PAPER TRAY UNIT D331 1 16 1 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 16 1 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 16 SP Settings 1 18 1 4 LCT B391...

Page 14: ...EDURE 1 39 1 11 BRIDGE UNIT D368 1 43 1 11 1 COMPONENT LIST 1 43 1 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 44 1 12 1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 1 45 1 12 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 45 1 12 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 46 1 13 1000 SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B793 1 48 1 13 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 48 1 13 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 49 1 14 500 SHEET FINISHER D372 1 53 1 14 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 53 1 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 53...

Page 15: ...Restoring the encryption key 1 75 Clearing the NVRAM 1 76 1 20 3 MORE ABOUT HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT D377 1 76 Overview 1 76 Encrypted Data 1 76 Procedure Flow 1 77 Encryption Key 1 77 Encryption Key Restoration 1 78 1 21 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT D362 1 79 1 21 1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 1 79 1 21 2 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL 1 80 1 21 3 DOS INSTALLATION 1 80 1 22 BROWSER UNIT TYPE D D377 1 83 1 22 1 ACCESSORI...

Page 16: ...NER UNIT 3 2 3 2 4 LASER UNIT 3 3 3 2 5 FUSING UNIT 3 3 3 2 6 PAPER FEED 3 3 3 2 7 OTHERS 3 3 3 3 SCANNER UNIT 3 4 3 3 1 EXPOSURE GLASS 3 4 3 3 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH WIDTH SENSORS 3 4 3 3 3 EXPOSURE LAMP 3 5 Reassembling 3 7 3 3 4 SCANNER MOTOR 3 8 3 3 5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU 3 8 Monochrome Scanner Unit 3 8 Color Scanner Unit 3 9 When reassembling 3 10 3 3 6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER 3 10 3 3 7 FRONT S...

Page 17: ...ANSFER ROLLER UNIT 3 31 3 6 2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR 3 32 3 7 FUSING EXIT 3 33 3 7 1 FUSING UNIT 3 33 3 7 2 THERMISTORS 3 34 3 7 3 THERMOSTATS 3 34 3 7 4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMPS 3 36 3 7 5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER 3 38 3 7 6 PAPER EXIT SENSOR PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR 3 39 3 8 PAPER FEED 3 40 3 8 1 FEED ROLLER TRAY 1 3 40 3 8 2 FEED ROLLER TRAY 2 3 41 3 8 3 FRICTION PAD 3 41 3 8 4 PAPER END S...

Page 18: ... SIO 3 57 Monochrome Scanner Unit D017 D019 3 57 Color Scanner Unit D018 D020 3 57 3 9 8 SIU 3 58 3 9 9 IPU 3 58 3 9 10 HDD 3 59 3 10 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 3 61 3 10 1 PRINTING 3 61 Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 3 61 Blank Margin 3 62 Main Scan Magnification 3 63 Parallelogram Image Adjustment 3 64 3 10 2 SCANNING 3 65 Registration Platen Mode 3 65 Magnification 3 65 3 10 3 A...

Page 19: ...ECKING IMAGES WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN 4 44 4 5 3 CORRECTING THE IMAGES 4 45 Correcting Skewed Images 4 45 Correcting Trapezoid Images 4 49 Correcting Parallelogram Images 4 50 4 6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 4 51 4 6 1 SENSORS 4 51 4 6 2 SWITCHES 4 58 4 7 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS 4 59 SERVICE TABLES 5 SERVICE TABLES 5 1 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 5 1 1 SERVICE MODE LOCK UNLOCK 5 1 5 1 2 SERVICE ...

Page 20: ... DATA LOG 5 157 5 9 SP8XXX DATA LOG 2 5 169 5 10 FIRMWARE UPDATE 5 213 5 11 USER TOOLS 5 214 5 11 1 UP MODE INITIAL SCREEN USER TOOLS COUNTER DISPLAY 5 214 5 11 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS 5 214 5 11 3 COPIER DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES 5 214 5 11 4 PRINTER FACSIMILE SCANNER SETTINGS 5 215 5 11 5 INQUIRY 5 215 5 11 6 COUNTER 5 215 5 12 LED AND DIP SWITCHES 5 216 5 12 1 LEDS 5 216 Controller 5 216 SBCU 5 216 5 ...

Page 21: ... BOARD STRUCTURE 6 12 6 2 1 MAIN BOARDS 6 12 6 2 2 CONTROLLER BOARD 6 14 6 3 COPY PROCESS 6 16 6 4 SCANNING 6 18 6 4 1 OVERVIEW 6 18 6 4 2 SCANNER DRIVE 6 19 6 4 3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 6 20 6 4 4 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER 6 21 6 5 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 22 6 5 1 OVERVIEW 6 22 6 5 2 SBU SENSOR BOARD UNIT 6 23 Monochrome Scanner Unit 6 23 Color Scanner Unit 6 24 6 5 3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY 6 25 6 5 4 ORI...

Page 22: ...Density Sensor Initial Setting 6 44 Toner Density Measurement 6 44 Vsp Vsg Detection 6 44 Toner Supply Reference Voltage Vref Determination 6 44 Toner Supply Determination 6 45 Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations 6 45 6 9 7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS 6 46 ID sensor 6 46 TD Sensor 6 46 6 9 8 TONER NEAR END END DETECTION AND RECOVERY 6 47 Toner Near end Detection 6 47 Toner Nea...

Page 23: ...CURRENT TIMING 6 67 6 12 3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING 6 68 6 12 4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM 6 69 6 13 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6 70 6 13 1 OVERVIEW 6 70 6 13 2 FUSING DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM 6 71 6 13 3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM 6 71 6 13 4 PRESSURE ROLLER 6 72 6 13 5 CLEANING MECHANISM 6 72 6 13 6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL 6 73 Temperature Control 6 73 Fusing Lamp Control 6 73 ...

Page 24: ... 4 Interchange Unit D371 7 5 1 Bin Tray D367 7 5 Bridge Unit D368 7 6 Shift Tray Unit D385 7 6 Paper Tray Unit D331 7 7 LCT B391 7 7 500 Sheet Finisher D372 7 8 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 7 10 1000 Sheet Finisher B793 7 11 B391 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY PS500 SEE SECTION B391 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B408 1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 SEE SECTION B408 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B793 BOOKLET FINISHER...

Page 25: ...ON D366 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D367 1 BIN TRAY BN3030 SEE SECTION D367 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D368 BRIDGE UNIT BU3020 SEE SECTION D368 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D369 DUPLEX UNIT AD3000 SEE SECTION D369 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D370 BYPASS TRAY BY3000 SEE SECTION D370 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D371 INTERCHANGE UNIT TYPE 3350 SEE SECTION D371 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CON...

Page 26: ...2 500 SHEET FINISHER SR3050 SEE SECTION D372 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D383 PRINTER SCANNER OPTION SEE SECTION D383 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D385 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3010 SEE SECTION D385 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 27: ... inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with the spec...

Page 28: ...emical reactions and heat build up The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions CONVENTIONS AND TRADEMARKS Conventions Symbol What it means Core Tech Manual Screw Connector E ring C ring Harness clamp FFC Flat...

Page 29: ...ure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft...

Page 30: ...emark of International Business Machines Corporation Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks ...

Page 31: ...OKLET FINISHER SR3000 D372 500 SHEET FINISHER SR3050 D383 PRINTER SCANNER OPTION SERVICE TABLES D369 DUPLEX UNIT AD3000 D371 INTERCHANGE UNIT TYPE 3350 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS D370 BYPASS TRAY BY3000 SPECIFICATIONS D367 1 BIN TRAY BN3030 APPENDIX D368 BRIDGE UNIT BU3020 D385 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3010 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITION 3 TAB POSITION 4 TAB POSITION 6 TAB POSITION 5 TAB POSIT...

Page 32: ......

Page 33: ...INSTALLATION ...

Page 34: ......

Page 35: ... includes Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater 7 Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive gases 8 Do not install the machine at any location over 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 9 Place the copier on a strong and level base Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm 10 Do not place the mac...

Page 36: ...aper tray If an operator stands at the front of the copier more space is required 1 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet Avoid multi wiring Be sure to ground the machine 1 Input voltage level 120 V 60 Hz More than 12 A 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz More than 7 A 110V 50 Hz 60 Hz More than 13 ...

Page 37: ...OPTIONS No Item Comments 1 Main Machine D017 D018 B019 D020 D019 D017 Monochrome or D018 D020 Color 2 ARDF D366 3 Platen Cover B406 4 Interchange Unit D371 Required for Item 5 7 5 Duplex Unit D369 6 Bypass Tray D370 7 1 Bin Tray D367 Requires Item 4 8 Internal Shift Tray D385 9 Paper Tray Unit D331 ...

Page 38: ...s See Note 1 18 SD Card Controller Options See Note 2 19 HDD Unit D362 D017 D019 only Note 1 The following interface boards are available for installation There is only one board slot on the back of the machine Only one of these options can be installed These options can be installed at any time Interface Board For Installation See Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 B826 Printer Scanner Option Cum...

Page 39: ...applications can be moved onto the PostScript 3 SD card For more see the Printer Scanner Option manual These options can be installed at any time SD Cards For Installation See Browser Unit Type D D377 This Section Data Overwrite Security Unit Type I D362 Printer Scanner Option HDD Encryption Option D377 This Section PostScript3 Unit Type 3350 D383 Printer Scanner Option Printer Enhance Option Type...

Page 40: ...Copier Installation D017 D018 D019 D020 1 6 SM 1 2 COPIER INSTALLATION 1 2 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS Rating voltages for peripherals Make sure to connect the cables to the correct sockets ...

Page 41: ...Copier Installation SM 1 7 D017 D018 D019 D020 Installation 1 2 2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently ...

Page 42: ...ng list No Description Quantity 1 Paper Tray Decal 1 2 Emblem Cover 1 3 Emblem 1 4 Model Name Decal 1 5 End Fence 1 6 HDD Caution Decal 17 29 only 1 7 Operating Instructions System Setting 1 8 Operating Instructions Copy Reference 1 1 2 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Tapes and Retainers Unplug the machine power cord before you start the following procedure ...

Page 43: ...install the copier Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine They will be reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future 1 Remove the tapes and the shipping retainer on the exterior of the copier 2 Install the end fence Developer 1 Spread the vinyl sheet provided with the developer kit on a flat surface 2 Open the right door A 3 Open the front door B 4 Push the lat...

Page 44: ...ear B slowly move the pack left and right and pour half of the developer over the auger C 10 Continue to turn the black gear until the developer is level 11 While continuing to turn the black gear slowly move the pack left and right and pour the remaining half of the developer over the auger until the developer is level Be careful Do not spill developer on the gears and sponges If you accidentally...

Page 45: ...ear end of the PCU 2 Make sure that the holes for the screws on the front and rear end of the PCU are aligned correctly If the holes are not aligned correctly make sure that the tabs at the front rear and left side of the PCU are engaged correctly Reattach the rear screws x2 first then reattach the front screw x1 Do not push down on the top of the PCU when you attach the rear and front screws ...

Page 46: ... C out 2 Shake the toner bottle D Do not remove the toner bottle cap E until after shaking 3 Unscrew the bottle cap E and insert the bottle into the holder Do not touch the inner bottle cap F 4 Reposition the holder and press down the holder lever to secure the bottle 5 Open the right cover 6 Rotate the green fusing pressure lever G to the up position ...

Page 47: ... positions You will hear a click 2 Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size To move the side guides first pull out the tray fully then push down the green lock at the rear of the tray Completion 1 If the optional bridge unit will not be installed swing the sensor feeler A out 2 Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover see ARDF Installation or Platen Cover ...

Page 48: ...set automatic paper size selection for the upper and lower tray 1912 1 Tray Auto Paper Size Detection Upper Tray 1913 2 Tray Auto Paper Size Detection Lower Tray 1 Size 1 B5 Exe Landscape 2 Size 2 A5 HLT 3 A4 LT 4 A4 LG 5 A3 LT 0 to 1 0 1 0 ISO A3 A4 A5 etc 1 USA DLT LT EXE etc 4 Enable the NIB and or USB function To enable the NIB function enter the SP mode and set SP5985 001 On Board NIC to 1 En...

Page 49: ...on 5 Exit SP mode 6 Do some test copies to make sure that the machine operates correctly 1 2 5 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE 1 Do SP 4806 001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation ...

Page 50: ...Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage 1 Re...

Page 51: ...ach a securing bracket C to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 8 each 6 Re install the connector cover 7 Remove the 1st and 2nd paper trays A 8 Fasten the paper tray unit at B x 2 M4x8 9 Reinstall the all paper trays 10 Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal and paper size decal to the each handle of the trays The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of ...

Page 52: ...and turn the machine on 2 Do SP1914 and SP1915 to set automatic paper size detection for the upper and lower tray of the paper tray unit 1914 3 Tray Auto Paper Size Detection Upper Tray 1915 4 Tray Auto Paper Size Detection Lower Tray 1 Size 1 B5 Exe Landscape 2 Size 2 A5 HLT 3 A4 LT 4 A4 LG 5 A3 LT 0 to 1 0 1 0 ISO A3 A4 A5 etc 1 USA DLT LT EXE etc 3 Exit SP mode 4 Do some test copies to make sur...

Page 53: ...Size Decal 1 1 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may ...

Page 54: ...pier A on the LCT B When installing the copier Be careful not to pinch the cable C 3 Remove the connector cover A rivet screw x 1 4 Connect the cable B to the copier as shown 5 Attach a securing bracket C to each side of the LCT as shown x 1 each 6 Re install the connector cover ...

Page 55: ... trays and then secure the LCT with two screws 8 Load paper into the LCT 9 Reinstall the 1st and 2nd paper trays 10 Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal A and paper size decal B to the LCT tray cover The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main copier ...

Page 56: ...in switch SP Setting 1 Connect the copier and turn the machine on 2 Do SP1914 to set automatic paper size detection for the LCT 1914 3 Tray Auto Paper Size Detection 1 Size 1 B5 Exe Landscape 2 Size 2 A5 HLT 3 A4 LT 4 A4 LG 5 A3 LT 0 to 1 0 1 0 ISO A3 A4 A5 etc 1 USA DLT LT EXE etc 3 Exit SP mode 4 Do some test copies to make sure that the machine operates correctly ...

Page 57: ...d condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 ARDF 1 2 Stamp Cartridge 1 3 Knob Screw 2 4 Stud Screw 2 5 Attention Decal Top Cover 1 1 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the all tapes and shipping retainers ...

Page 58: ...sert the two stud screws A on the top of the machine 3 Mount the ARDF A by aligning the screw keyholes B of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws 4 Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine 5 Secure the ARDF with the two knob screw C ...

Page 59: ...amp cartridge A in the ARDF 7 Peel off the platen sheet A and place it on the exposure glass 8 Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet with the corner B on the exposure glass 9 Close the ARDF 10 Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached ...

Page 60: ... turn on the main power switch of the machine and then check the ARDF operation 13 Make a full size copy Check that the registrations side to side and leading edge and image skew are correct If they are not adjust the registrations and image skew referring to the service manual Copy Adjustments in the Replacements and Adjustments ...

Page 61: ...1 1 6 1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Quantity 1 Interchange Unit 1 2 Tapping Screw M3 x 8 2 1 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove all tapes ...

Page 62: ...18 D019 D020 1 28 SM 2 Open the right cover A of the copier 3 Remove the right upper cover B x 3 4 Remove the front right cover C hook 5 Slide out the exit cover D 6 Install the interchange unit A x 2 7 Connect the two harnesses B ...

Page 63: ... CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Qty 1 1 Bin Tray Guide 1 2 1 Bin Tray Unit 1 3 Tapping Screw M3 x 8 1 4 Sub tray 1 5 Tray Guide 1 6 Tray 1 1 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure ...

Page 64: ...t be installed 1 Remove all tapes 2 If the optional bridge unit has been installed open the right jam removal cover A of the bridge unit or If the optional bridge unit is not installed skip this step 3 If the duplex unit has not been installed go to Step 7 If the duplex unit has been installed 4 Remove the front right cover A ...

Page 65: ... Unit D367 SM 1 31 D017 D018 D019 D020 Installation 5 Remove the duplex tray A and duplex tray guide B 6 Remove the duplex guide C x 1 Install the 1 Bin Tray 7 Remove plate A x2 8 Attach the 1 bin tray guide B x2 ...

Page 66: ...D020 1 32 SM 9 Install the 1 bin tray unit A x 1 x 1 10 Re install the front right cover 11 Install the tray guide A 12 Install the tray B 13 Install the sub tray C 14 Turn on the main power switch and check the 1 bin tray unit operation ...

Page 67: ...ONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Shift Tray Unit 1 2 Stepped Screw 1 3 Paper Guide Large 2 4 Paper Guide Small 1 1 8 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure ...

Page 68: ...s 3 Install the large paper guide B and two small paper guides C as shown 4 Install the stepped screw A 5 Install the shift tray unit B as shown Set the shift tray on the stepped screw The shift tray must be installed under the paper guide C installed in step 3 6 Connect the cable D to the copier ...

Page 69: ...select the shift tray with the user tool System Settings General Features Output Copier and Output Document Server Facsimile Printer Enable the shift tray you can also enable the standard tray internal Tray 1 1 bin tray internal tray 2 or the finisher proof tray 8 Check the shift tray operation ...

Page 70: ...1 9 1 COMPONENTS CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Quantity 1 By pass Tray Unit 1 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Tapping Screw 2 1 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Disconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure ...

Page 71: ...er A x 2 and cover B x 2 These removed screws will be used in steps 3 and 5 3 Install the by pass tray unit A x 4 two of these are removed in Step 2 4 Connect the cable B to the machine 5 Install the connector cover C x 1 this screw is removed in Step 2 6 Open the right cover A 7 Release the rear link B x 1 ...

Page 72: ... rear link shaft A clockwise by 360 degrees to strengthen the spring tension 9 Reattach the rear link x 1 10 Close the right cover 11 Turn the main power switch on and check the by pass tray function 12 Make a copy from the by pass tray Then check the registration ...

Page 73: ...inst the following list No Description Quantity 1 Duplex Unit 1 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Tapping Screw M3 x 8 3 4 Clip 1 5 Duplex Guide 1 6 Duplex Tray 1 7 Duplex Tray Guide 1 1 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure Before installing the duplex unit the optional interchange unit D371 must be installed ...

Page 74: ...ve all tapes 2 Remove the connector cover A x 1 3 Open the right cover B of the optional paper tray unit or LCT and right cover C 4 Release the rear link D from the right cover x 1 5 Release the front link A from the mainframe 6 Remove the right cover B ...

Page 75: ...all the duplex unit B 9 Attach the front link C of the duplex unit to the main machine 10 Install the bracket D x 1 11 Attach the link A to the shaft B and secure it with the clip 12 Connect the cable C and install the connector cover D x 1 These last steps are not required if the 1 Bin Tray has been installed ...

Page 76: ...Duplex Unit D369 D017 D018 D019 D020 1 42 SM 13 Install the duplex guide A x 1 14 Install the duplex tray guide B and duplex tray C 15 Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function ...

Page 77: ...D019 D020 Installation 1 11 BRIDGE UNIT D368 1 11 1 COMPONENT LIST Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Quantity 1 Bridge Unit 1 2 Securing Plate 1 3 Shoulder Screw 1 4 Knob Screw 1 ...

Page 78: ...he sensor feeler C is out fold it away into the machine 4 Remove the cover A 5 Install the bridge unit B 1 shoulder screw 1 knob screw 6 Reinstall the front right cover C 7 Connect the cable D to the main machine 8 Attach the securing plate E as shown Do not attach it with a screw This is done when securing the front stand for the optional finisher 9 Install the optional finisher refer to the fini...

Page 79: ...y and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty For this model 1 Staple Position Decal 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 3 Front Joint Bracket 1 4 Screw M4 x 14 4 Use 3 5 Knob Screw M4 x 10 1 6 Copy Tray 1 7 Knob Screw M3 x 8 1 8 Screw M3 x 8 1 9 Rear Joint Bracket 1 10 Grounding Plate 1 Necessary Not necessary ...

Page 80: ...he following options must be installed before you install this finisher Bridge Unit D368 Paper Tray Unit D331 or LCT B391 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes Be sure to keep screw A It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 4 2 Install the front joint bracket A x 2 M4 x 17 and rear joint bracket B x 1 M4 x 17 3 Remove the left stand C x 3 ...

Page 81: ...r B Then pull the locking lever C x 1 knob M3 x 8 6 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever 7 Secure the locking lever x 1 knob M3 x 8 and close the front door 8 Install the copy tray D x 1 knob M4 x 10 9 Connect the finisher cable E to the main machine 10 Attach the staple position decal A to the ARDF as shown 11 Turn on the ac switch and check t...

Page 82: ...e components against the following list No Description Quantity For D017 D018 D019 D020 1 Rear Joint Bracket 1 No 2 Front Joint Bracket 1 Yes 3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Yes 4 Grounding Plate 1 Yes 5 Upper Output Tray 1 Yes 6 Cushion 2 Yes 7 Lower Output Tray 1 Yes 8 Short Knob screw 1 Yes 9 Long Knob screw 1 Yes 10 Screw M3 x 8 2 Yes 11 Screw M4 x 14 4 Yes Use all ...

Page 83: ...E Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure Some optional units must be installed before installing this finisher B793 Refer to the table below about requirement options for each machine Machine Code Requirement Optional Units D017 D018 D019 D020 D368 and either B391 or D331 ...

Page 84: ...the front door A of the 1000 sheet booklet finisher and then pull out the jogger unit B 3 Remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher 4 Attach the cushions A to the finisher Make sure that the cushions are placed within 0 to 1 mm B from the edge of the cover or frame 5 Install the ground plate C on the finisher D x 2 M3 x 8 ...

Page 85: ...M4 x 14 8 Remove the left support C from the optional paper tray unit or LCT 9 Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine keeping its front door open until the brackets A B go into their slots 10 Push the lock lever C and then secure it Long knob screw x 1 11 Close the front door of the finisher 12 Connect the finisher connector D to the machine ...

Page 86: ...her B793 D017 D018 D019 D020 1 52 SM 13 Install the upper output tray A short knob screw x 1 14 Install the lower output tray B 15 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 16 Check the 1000 sheet booklet finisher operation ...

Page 87: ...the following list No Description Q ty For D017 D018 D019 D020 1 Unit Holder 1 Yes 2 Shift Tray 1 Yes 3 Holder Bracket 1 Yes 4 Screw M3 x 8 4 Yes Use 2 5 Screw M3 x 6 1 Yes 6 Screw M4 x 14 4 Yes Use 3 7 Screw M4 x 20 4 No 8 Support Bracket 2 No 9 Support Bracket Cover 2 No 1 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure ...

Page 88: ...0 1 54 SM Before you install the 500 sheet finisher the optional bridge unit D368 must be installed 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes 2 Install the unit holder A x 3 M4 x 14 Make sure that the bracket B is installed in the bridge unit ...

Page 89: ...D018 D019 D020 Installation 3 Install the 500 sheet finisher A 4 Install the holder bracket B x 1 M3 x 6 5 Connect the finisher cable C 6 Install the shift tray A x 2 M3 x 8 7 Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation ...

Page 90: ...Platen Cover B406 D017 D018 D019 D020 1 56 SM 1 15 PLATEN COVER B406 1 Install the platen cover A x 2 ...

Page 91: ...isconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove two caps A 2 Connect the key counter cable B 3 Install the stepped screw C 4 Hold the key counter plate nuts A on the inside of the key counter bracket B and insert the key counter holder C 5 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x 2 ...

Page 92: ... Connect the cable A 8 Hook the key counter holder assembly B onto the stepped screw C 9 Secure the key counter holder assembly with a screw D 10 Use the User Tools to enable the counter function for the following modes Copy mode Document server mode Fax mode Scanner mode Printer mode ...

Page 93: ...ar Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section 2 Open the ARDF or platen cover 3 Glass cover A x 4 4 ARDF exposure glass B 5 Rear scale C x 3 6 Exposure glass with left scale D 7 Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the scanner motor E 8 Install the heater F in the scanner unit x 1 hook 9 Put the connector G through the cutout ...

Page 94: ... the connector H blue and red cords in the frame of the machine 11 Reassemble the machine 1 17 2 TRAY HEATER COPIER Disconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove Connector cover A Rear upper cover B x 4 Rear lower cover C x 4 ...

Page 95: ...the tray heater assembly C x 1 5 Remove the 2nd paper lift motor A x 2 x 1 6 Route the heater cable B as shown 7 Clamp the heater cable at C as shown 8 Connect the heater cable to the ac cable at D 1 17 3 TRAY HEATER OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT Disconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove the joint brackets A x 1 each ...

Page 96: ...move the rear cover B for the optional paper tray unit x 2 3 Remove the cable guide A x 1 4 Slide out the two paper trays from the optional paper tray unit 5 Pass the connector A through the opening B 6 Install the tray heater assembly C x 1 ...

Page 97: ...D018 D019 D020 Installation 7 Remove the heater harness cover A rivet screw x 1 8 Clamp the cables A as shown 9 Join the connectors B 10 Reinstall the cable guide 11 Reinstall the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit ...

Page 98: ...t cutout A is directed downward Otherwise the rear cover of the main machine pinches the heater harness and breaks it 13 Reinstall the two paper trays into the optional paper tray unit 14 Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier 15 Remove two screws A and install the screws B which were removed in step 11 16 Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier ...

Page 99: ... HEATER OPTIONAL LCT Disconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove two joint brackets A x 1 each 2 Remove the rear cover for the LCT B x 2 3 Slide out the paper tray A 4 Push the stopper B on both slide rails and remove the paper tray ...

Page 100: ...Heaters D017 D018 D019 D020 1 66 SM 5 Pass the connector A through the opening B 6 Install the tray heater C x 1 7 Install five clamps x5 8 Connect the cable tray heater cable A ...

Page 101: ...he cable and clamp it 10 Remove the connector cover of the copier A 11 Join the connectors B 12 Reinstall the connector cover of the copier 13 Remove two screws A from the rear side of the LCT 14 Reinstall the rear cover of the LCT 15 Reinstall the paper tray ...

Page 102: ...Heaters D017 D018 D019 D020 1 68 SM 16 Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier 17 Remove two screws A and install the screws B which were removed in step 13 18 Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier ...

Page 103: ...Quantity 1 Bracket Not used for the B205 series copiers 1 2 Screws 4 3 FFC Short Not used 1 4 Harness Not used 1 5 FFC Long 1 6 Connection Cable 1 7 Harness Clamp 1 8 ICIB 1 1 18 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the copier power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove these parts see Controller Board in Replacement and Adjustment Controller board plastic...

Page 104: ...y unit connector cover x1 Disconnect the paper tray unit or LCT if it is installed x1 Rear cover x1 3 Pull the controller board partially out of the left slot to disconnect it from the IPU 4 Remove the IPU A from the main machine The board for this option is installed on the back of the IPU board 5 Attach the harness clamp B 6 Attach the ICIB C x4 ...

Page 105: ...t the cable D between the ICIB C and the IPU Board A 8 Connect the flat film connector E to the ICIB and IPU boards 9 Reinstall the IPU board 10 Turn on the machine 11 Enable the Copy Data Security function User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Data Security for Copying ...

Page 106: ...pplication cover x1 2 Remove the controller board See Controller Board 3 Attach the HDD unit A to the controller board bracket x2 x3 4 Reinstall the controller board with the HDD After Installing the HDD 1 Do SP5832 001 to format the hard disk 2 Do SP5853 001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk 3 Do SP5846 040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controll...

Page 107: ...nstall the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 When you remove each seal the VOID marks 2 can be seen In this condition they cannot be reattached to the box Installation Procedure 1 Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator...

Page 108: ...e SD card in SD card B Slot 2 lower The encryption SD card must be installed in Slot 2 lower 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Enter the SP mode 8 Select SP5878 002 Option Setup Encryption Option and then touch Execute 9 Turn off the main power switch 10 Remove the SD card 11 Attach the slot cover A x 1 12 Switch the machine on 13 Login to User Tools as the Administrator 14 Go to User Tools System...

Page 109: ..._key txt file in the restore_key folder in the SD card 4 Ask an administrator to input the encryption key this has been printed out earlier by the user into the nvram_key txt file 5 Remove only the HDD unit HDD Unit 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the encryption key in the machine 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Inser...

Page 110: ...ins nvclear into slot 2 9 Turn on the main power switch and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board 10 Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status 11 Remove the SD card from slot 2 12 Turn on the main power switch 13 Initialize the NVRAM SP5801 001 and HDD unit SP5832 001 with SP mode 14 The user must enab...

Page 111: ...Format All Data encrypts the item indicated with 1 in the table above and deletes other data 3 All Data encrypts all data in the table above Procedure Flow A The CE customer engineer installs the unit A then an administrator uses the activating function The administrator prints out the encryption key B The administrator keeps the encryption key information C in a safe place Encryption Key After th...

Page 112: ...ction works properly only when the keys in the controller board NVRAM and HDD match SC858 859 or 878 occurs if there is a problem with restoring or updating the encryption key For details of how to update the encryption key refer to the Operating Instructions The customer engineer then asks an administrator to input the encryption key B into an SD card C Encryption key restoration is completed D a...

Page 113: ...dministrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the DOS option can be installed 3 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication On If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setting must be On before you can do the installation proc...

Page 114: ... see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 When you remove each seal the VOID marks 2 can be seen In this condition they cannot be reattached to the box 1 21 4 DOS INSTALLATION 1 Switch OFF the machine 2 Disconnect the network cable 3 Turn the main power switch ON 4 Turn the operation swi...

Page 115: ... SP mode turn the operation switch off then turn the main power switch OFF 11 Turn the machine power ON 12 Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area a of the diagnostic report are the same as those in area b a ROM Number Firmware Version HDD Format Option b Loading Program GW5a_zoffym Diagnostic Report ROM No Firmware Version a Loading Program b DataOverwriteSecurity Unit HDD Format Op...

Page 116: ... overwrite erase icon The icon B changes to C when job data is stored in the hard disk The icon goes back to its usual shape B after this function has completed a data overwrite operation to the hard disk 18 Do SP5990 005 SP print mode Diagnostic Report 19 Exit SP mode 20 Remove the Document Server and Scanner key tops and replace them with the blank key tops that are supplied with the kit B A C R...

Page 117: ...r A x1 3 Insert the browser SD card B into SD card Slot 1 upper 4 Turn the machine on 5 Push User Tools Login Logout 6 Login with the administrator user name and password 7 Touch Extended Feature Settings twice 8 Touch SD Card then touch the Browser line 9 Under Install to touch Machine HDD Next 10 When you see Ready to Install check the information on the screen to confirm your previous selection...

Page 118: ...ALLATION 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the plastic application cover x1 3 Remove the board slot cover A x2 4 Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands 5 Set the interface board B in the open slot 6 Confirm that the board is inserted completely then fasten it x 2 7 Turn the machine power on 8 Enter the SP mode and do SP5990 to print an SMC Report 9 Read the repor...

Page 119: ...essories and their quantities against the table below Description Q ty 1 VM SD Card 1 2 Decal 1 1 24 2 INSTALLATION 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the plastic application cover x1 3 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 4 Insert the SD card B into SD Slot 2 lower This SD card must be inserted into Slot 2 the lower slot ...

Page 120: ......

Page 121: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ...

Page 122: ......

Page 123: ...120K 240K 360K NOTE SCANNER LASER OPTICS Reflector C C C Optics cloth 1st Mirror C C C C Optics cloth 2nd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth 3rd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth Scanner Guide Rails C C C Do not use alcohol Platen Sheet Cover C I I I Replace the platen sheet if necessary Dry cloth or alcohol Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth APS Sensor C C C Dry cl...

Page 124: ...Developer R R R Do SP2801 This initializes the developer and resets the TD and ID sensor outputs to their defaults It also resets the PCU counter EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE PAPER FEED Registration Rollers C C C C Clean with water Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water Bottom Plate Pad...

Page 125: ... Roller R R R Pressure Roller R R R Fusing Thermistors R R R Cleaning Roller C C C Cleaning Roller Bushings C C C Clean with water or alcohol Hot Roller Strippers R R R Hot Roller and Pressure Roller Bushings L L L L Grease Barrierta JFE5 5 2 A0289300 Paper Exit Guide Ribs C C C Clean with water or alcohol OTHERS Main Motor Drive Gear L I I I Silicone Grease G501 see Main Motor Drive Gear EM 120K ...

Page 126: ...Clean with alcohol Platen Sheet C C C C Clean with alcohol EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE PAPER TRAY UNIT Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water Bottom Plate Pad C C C C Clean with water Relay Clutch I I I Replace if necessary Paper Feed Clutch I I I Replace if necessary EM 120K 240K 360K...

Page 127: ...sary EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE 1 000 sheet Finisher Rollers C Clean with water or alcohol Brush Roller I I I I Replace if necessary Discharge Brush C C C C Clean with a dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if necessary EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE 1 000 sheet Booklet Finisher Rollers C Damp cloth Discharge Brush C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Punch Kit Punch Chads C Discard ch...

Page 128: ...D020 2 6 SM EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE Rollers C Damp cloth Discharge Brush C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE 1 bin tray unit Rollers C Dry or damp cloth Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth Sensors C Blower brush ...

Page 129: ...Main Motor Drive Gear SM 2 7 D017 D018 D019 D020 Preventive Maintenance 2 2 MAIN MOTOR DRIVE GEAR At every EM lubricate the main motor drive gear A with silicone grease G501 ...

Page 130: ......

Page 131: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...

Page 132: ......

Page 133: ...Chart S5S 10 pcs set 1 Common General 3 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87 1 Common General 4 A2309003 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit 1 Common R C3 5 A2679002 Positioning Pin Laser Unit 1 Common R C3 6 B6455010 SD Card 1 Common General 7 B6456800 USB Reader Writer 1 Common General 8 G0219350 Loop back Connector 1 Common General 3 1 2 LUBRICANTS No Part No Description Q ty Availability 1 A2579300 Grea...

Page 134: ... ammonia gas Never shake the used PCU Doing so may cause toner and or developer to spill out Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord before you start any of the procedures in this section To prevent toner leakage never loosen or remove the screws shown in the illustration below 3 2 2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT Never touch the...

Page 135: ...lling the fusing thermistor make sure that it is in contact with the hot roller and that the hot roller can rotate freely Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension springs Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the inner surface of the hot roller 3 2 6 PAPER FEE...

Page 136: ...ASS 1 Glass cover A x 4 2 ARDF exposure glass B 3 Rear scale C x 3 4 Exposure glass with left scale D Position the white marker E at the rear left corner and the blue marker at the front left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass 3 3 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH WIDTH SENSORS ...

Page 137: ...ength sensors B snap x 1 each 4 The number of the original length sensors depends on the model 3 for EU 2 for others 5 Original width sensors C snap x 1 x1 each 3 3 3 EXPOSURE LAMP 1 Remove A Harness cover x1 B Rear cover x4 C Scanner rear cover x1 D Scanner left cover x2 E Scanner right cover x2 F Scanner front cover x3 G Operation panel x5 x1 H Support cover Tab x1 ...

Page 138: ...Scanner Unit D017 D018 D019 D020 3 6 SM 2 Remove A Rear stay x7 x2 B Left stay x3 C Front stay x5 3 Disconnect the connector A x2 1 ...

Page 139: ...17 D018 D019 D020 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Remove the pulley A 5 Hold down the snap B 6 Remove the exposure lamp C x2 x1 x1 Reassembling 1 Run the cable so that there is no slack 2 Slide clamp A to adjust the cable slack ...

Page 140: ...CANNER MOTOR 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Scanner motor assembly A x 2 x 1 spring x 1 3 Scanner motor B x 2 3 3 5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU Monochrome Scanner Unit 1 Remove Exposure glass Exposure glass A SBU cover x3 B Original length sensor bracket x1 x1 ...

Page 141: ...SM 3 9 D017 D018 D019 D020 Replacement and Adjustment 1 Remove A Sensor board unit x3 x3 x1 Color Scanner Unit 1 Remove Exposure glass Exposure glass A SBU cover x3 B Cover x2 C Original length sensor bracket x1 x1 ...

Page 142: ...SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit SP4 008 Sub Scan Mag SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg SP4 011 Main Scan Reg SP4 688 DF Density Adjustment This SP code adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different For more details see Image Adjustment Scanning 3 3 6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...

Page 143: ...ndoff x1 x 2 Monochrome Scanner Unit or Exposure lamp stabilizer 1 x 2 x 2 Color Scanner Unit 3 3 7 FRONT SCANNER WIRE 1 Exposure glass Exposure Glass 2 Front frame Exposure Lamp 3 Front scanner wire clamp A 4 Front scanner wire bracket B x 1 5 Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley C x 1 Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire ...

Page 144: ...machine s front five times Wind the left end clockwise twice The two red marks D come together when you have done this Stick the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pulley on the shaft E Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Insert the left end into the slit F The end should go via the r...

Page 145: ...attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time 7 Remove the tape from the drive pulley 8 Insert a scanner positioning pin L through the 2nd carriage hole M and the left holes N in the front rail Insert another scanner positioning pin O through the 1st carriage hole P and the right holes in the front rail Q 9 Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail 1...

Page 146: ...he ball B through the drive pulley notch 3 Pass the right end with the ring C through the drive pulley notch 4 Wind the left end B clockwise from the machine front five times 5 Wind the right end C counterclockwise twice The two red marks D come together after winding Attach the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at installation 6 Install the drive pulley on the ...

Page 147: ...the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press Clear press 1 9 9 3 press D 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 1 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark when shows 5 Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker shows exactly where the screen is ...

Page 148: ...f the procedures in this section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes 3 4 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS The caution decal is located in the laser section as shown below 3 4 2 LASER UNIT Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord before you start this procedure in this section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes ...

Page 149: ...it SM 3 17 D017 D018 D019 D020 Replacement and Adjustment 1 Remove 500 Sheet finisher Bridge unit Optional shift tray or 1 Bin tray 2 Remove A Upper front cover x1 Hook x1 B Front cover Pins x2 C Inner cover x5 ...

Page 150: ...Laser Unit D017 D018 D019 D020 3 18 SM 3 Remove A Copy tray Hook x1 1 Remove A Toner bottle B Laser unit x2 x2 ...

Page 151: ... 2 Remove the heat sink A x4 3 Replace the polygon mirror motor B x4 x1 When you install the new polygon mirror motor do not touch the surface of the mirror with bare hands 3 4 4 LD UNIT 1 Remove the laser unit see Laser Unit 2 Replace the LD unit A x3 x1 Do not remove the screws B Do not touch any variable resistors on the LD unit ...

Page 152: ...D020 3 20 SM 3 4 5 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR 1 Remove the laser unit see Laser Unit 2 Remove the heat sink A x4 3 Remove the laser unit cover B x3 4 Remove the bracket C x1 5 Replace the laser synchronization detector D x1 ...

Page 153: ... power cord before you start any of the procedures in this section To prevent toner leakage never loosen or remove the screws shown in the illustration below 3 5 1 PCU REMOVAL 1 Open the right cover A and front cover B 2 Pull the PCU C out a small distance while you push the release lever D then remove the PCU Do not touch the drum surface with bare hands ...

Page 154: ...2 PICK OFF PAWLS 1 Remove the PCU See PCU Removal 2 Hold the pawl A by its sides pull it down and slowly twist it away from the PCU 3 5 3 OPC DRUM 1 Remove the PCU See PCU Removal 2 Front cover A x2 3 Rear cover B x3 Coupling x1 4 Top part C 5 Bottom part D ...

Page 155: ...um E White clip x1 F 3 5 4 CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER 1 Remove the PCU See PCU Removal 2 Remove the OPC drum See OPC Drum 3 Front stud A 4 Rear shoulder screw B x1 5 Release the front and rear springs C 6 Remove the roller assembly D Springs x2 Arms x2 Rollers x2 7 Charge roller E ...

Page 156: ... 5 CLEANING BLADE 1 Remove the PCU See PCU Removal 2 Remove the OPC drum See OPC Drum 3 Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller See Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 4 Cleaning blade A x2 Reinstallation Cleaning Blade To prevent damage to the new cleaning blade and OPC drum apply some toner to the edge of the new blade B Install the new blade Remove some toner from the edge of the old blade with ...

Page 157: ...lacement and Adjustment 4 Remove the front screw A x1 5 Remove the rear screws B x2 6 Release the front tab C 7 Release the rear tab D 8 Separate the top E and bottom F of the development unit 9 Turn the gears G to remove the developer from the bottom half ...

Page 158: ...nt unit At reinstallation make sure that the mylar is positioned as shown 11 Turn the development roller gear I to remove toner from around the development roller 12 Assemble the development unit Dispose of the used developer according to the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items ...

Page 159: ...uger L 15 Continue to rotate the black gear until the developer is level 16 While continuing to turn the black gear slowly move the pack left and right and pour the remaining half of the developer over the augur until the developer is level Be careful Do not spill developer on the gears or sponges If you accidentally spill developer on the gears or sponges remove it with a magnet or the tip of a m...

Page 160: ... C Never touch the lever D until after the top screw has been fastened 4 Screws x3 coupling x1 E Never press down on the top of the PCU when you reattach the rear or front cover 5 Lower screw x1 F Always install the lower screw first to maintain the correct gap between the rollers 6 Top screw x1 G Lift and lower the lever D to make sure that the shutter opens fully and operates smoothly ...

Page 161: ...e that the tabs at the front rear and left side of the PCU are engaged correctly 3 5 7 AFTER REPLACEMENT OF PCU COMPONENTS Do this procedure after you replace the PCU components and developer 1 Assemble the PCU and install it in the machine 2 Turn the machine on 3 If you replaced developer go into the SP mode and do SP2801 Developer Initialization 4 Make 5 sample copies 5 Check the copies If the c...

Page 162: ...e machine 9 Turn the machine on and close the front door After the machine turns the development roller for 10 seconds go to the next step 10 Open and close the door two more times The total rotation time is 30 seconds 11 If you replaced PCU components If A4 8 x11 paper is installed make 4 copies or prints If A3 11 x 17 paper is installed make 2 copies or prints To make solid black prints use SP29...

Page 163: ...3 6 TRANSFER UNIT Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord before you start any of the procedures in this section 3 6 1 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT 1 Open the right cover A 2 Remove the transfer roller unit B Hook x1 Do not touch the transfer roller surface ...

Page 164: ...er Unit D017 D018 D019 D020 3 32 SM 3 6 2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR 1 Open the right cover 2 Remove A Transfer roller B Roller guide x1 x1 3 Remove A Image density sensor x1 4 Initialize the new sensor with SP2935 ...

Page 165: ... main power switch and disconnect the power cord before you start any of the procedures in this section 3 7 1 FUSING UNIT Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure 1 Release the duplex unit if it has been installed and open the right cover 2 Remove the fusing unit A x2 ...

Page 166: ...D020 3 34 SM 3 7 2 THERMISTORS 1 Remove the fusing unit See Fusing Unit 2 Remove the plates A x1 each 3 Replace the thermistors B x1 3 7 3 THERMOSTATS 1 Remove the fusing unit See Fusing Unit 2 Remove the fusing upper cover A x4 ...

Page 167: ...t SM 3 35 D017 D018 D019 D020 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Remove A Pressure spring B Pressure spring C Ground wire x1 D Hot roller stripper bracket x4 4 Remove A Thermostat cover Tap x2 B Plate x2 spring washers ...

Page 168: ...s x4 3 7 4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMPS 1 Remove the fusing unit See Fusing Unit 2 Remove these parts see Thermostats Fusing upper cover Pressure springs Hot roller stripper bracket 3 Remove the fusing lamps x4 and hot roller assembly A Do not touch the surface of the fusing lamp with bare hands ...

Page 169: ... you reattach the C rings the flat sides must face the bearing roller The little hooks C must face away from the bearing roller Reinstallation 1 At the rear gear side attach the C ring so that the opening A is 90 degrees from the D cut sections B of the fusing roller 2 Apply enough grease at C so the metal surface is not visible ...

Page 170: ...llers When reinstalling the fusing lamp secure the front screws first Be careful not to damage the surface of the hot roller 3 7 5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER 1 Remove the fusing lamp and hot roller assembly See Hot Roller and Fusing Lamp 2 Replace the pressure roller A x1 Bushings x2 Spring x1 3 Replace the cleaning roller B Apply grease Barrierta to the inner surface of the bushing for the p...

Page 171: ... EXIT SENSOR PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR 1 Remove the front upper cover A x1 Peg x1 2 Remove the exit cover B If the optional one bin tray unit and or interchange unit have been installed remove them 3 Remove the cover C 4 Replace the exit sensor D x1 5 Replace the overflow sensor E x1 ...

Page 172: ...sconnect the power cord before you start any of the procedures in this section 3 8 1 FEED ROLLER TRAY 1 1 Pull out the paper tray 1 A 2 Pull up the stopper B 3 Paper feed roller C Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands After reinstalling the feed roller reset B to its former position ...

Page 173: ...FEED ROLLER TRAY 2 1 Pull out the paper tray 1 and 2 A 2 Pull up the stopper B 3 Paper feed roller C Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands After reinstalling the feed roller reset the lever B 3 8 3 FRICTION PAD 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Friction pad A spring x 1 ...

Page 174: ...SM 3 8 4 PAPER END SENSOR 1 Paper cassette 2 Bracket A x 1 x 1 3 Paper end sensor B Hook x1 3 8 5 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS 1 Remove the paper tray 2 Remove A Connector cover x1 and disconnect the cable B Rear cover x4 C Lower rear cover x4 ...

Page 175: ...r lift motors A x2 each x1 each 3 8 6 REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1 Remove the connector cover and the rear cover See Paper Tray Lift Motors 2 Remove the duplex connector cover and lower rear cover See Paper Tray Lift Motors 3 Remove the fly wheels A x1 4 Remove the registration clutch B x1 x1 ...

Page 176: ...Clutch 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the lower rear cover 3 Replace the lower paper feed clutch A x 1 x 1 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 1 Disconnect the connectors B for the BCU board as shown x15 2 Remove 4 screws C securing the BCU board bracket then swing down the BCU board bracket D ...

Page 177: ...ent and Adjustment 3 Remove the bracket E x1 4 Replace the upper paper feed clutch F x 1 x 1 3 8 8 RELAY CLUTCHES 1 Remove Rear connector cover x1 Rear cover x4 Lower rear cover x4 1 Remove A Upper relay clutch x1 x1 x1 B Lower relay clutch x1 x1 x1 ...

Page 178: ...ector cover x1 x1 Rear upper cover x4 Rear lower cover x4 3 Remove A Tray 1 paper size sensor bracket x 1 Tray paper size sensor x 1 Pawls x4 or B Tray 1 paper size sensor bracket x 1 Tray paper size sensor x 1 Pawls x4 3 8 10 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Open the right cover of the optional paper tray unit or LCT 1 Open the right cover A ...

Page 179: ...m the right cover x 1 3 Release the front link C from the mainframe 4 Remove the right cover D If the duplex unit is installed 1 Disconnect the right hinge A x1 2 Remove the connector cap B x1 3 Disconnect the duplex unit harness C x1 4 Disconnect the arm A then disconnect the snap hinges B and C ...

Page 180: ...Paper Feed D017 D018 D019 D020 3 48 SM 5 Remove A Transfer roller B Transfer roller guide x1 x1 1 Remove the guide plate A x2 x2 x1 ...

Page 181: ...Registration roller x2 Bushings x2 B Registration sensor bracket x1 C Registration sensor Pawls x4 3 8 11 UPPER LOWER RELAY SENSORS 1 Remove Right cover or Duplex unit if it is installed See the previous section 2 Remove A Upper cover B Upper relay sensor Bracket x1 x1 Pawls x4 ...

Page 182: ...lay sensor Bracket x1 x1 Pawls x4 3 8 12 DUST COLLECTION BIN 1 Remove A Front door L brackets x2 B Dust collection bin x1 2 Tap the dust collection bin above a sheet of paper to remove the paper dust 3 Use a dry cloth to clean the inside of the dust collection bin ...

Page 183: ...and replace them with new ones Never remove the NVRAMs until after you have uploaded their contents Before replacing the controller board in the model without HDD When you replace the controller board in a model without a HDD address book data can be copied from an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card Copy the address book data to an SD card from the flash ROM on the con...

Page 184: ...ccumulated on your hands 2 Remove A Faceplate x3 B Controller board x4 Make sure that the thermal conductive sheet C is attached to the bracket after replacement of this procedure 3 Remove A Upper brace B Lower brace C NVRAM x2 4 Remove the NVRAMs from the old board and install them on the new board The NVRAM chips must always be replaced as a pair ...

Page 185: ...ff the main switch 3 Remove the controller board cover x1 4 Put the SD card in SD card slot C3 5 Turn on the main switch 6 Do SP5824 7 Touch Execute to start to upload the NVRAM data 8 Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card 9 Remove the controller board x1 See Controller Board 10 Remove the NVRAM x2 and replace them with the new chips See Controller Board Both NVRAM chips must be replaced...

Page 186: ...n unit and encrypted data cannot be recovered For details refer to Recovery from a Device Problem in the installation procedure of the HDD Encryption Unit 3 9 3 BCU BOARD 1 Remove the rear cover See Paper Tray Lift Motors 2 Remove the BCU board A x All x6 3 Remove the NVRAM B from the old board and install it on the new board 4 Set the DIP switches on the new BCU board to the same settings as the ...

Page 187: ...ove the rear cover 2 Swing down the BCU board bracket See Paper Feed Clutches 3 Remove the power pack A x 4 x3 3 9 5 MAIN MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover See Paper Tray Lift Motors 2 Swing down the BCU board bracket A See Paper Feed Clutches 3 Remove the flywheels B x1 4 Replace the main motor C x2 x3 ...

Page 188: ...8 D019 D020 3 56 SM 3 9 6 PSU 1 Remove the optional finisher if it has been installed 2 Remove the application cover A x1 3 Remove the left cover B x6 4 Remove A Transformer x1 For the 220 V machine only B PSU x all x6 Standoff x1 ...

Page 189: ...9 D020 Replacement and Adjustment 3 9 7 SIO Monochrome Scanner Unit D017 D019 1 Remove Rear cover A SIO bracket x3 x2 B SIO board x4 Color Scanner Unit D018 D020 1 Remove Rear cover A Ground wire connector x1 x1 B SIO bracket x3 C SIO board x4 ...

Page 190: ...PCBs and Other Items D017 D018 D019 D020 3 58 SM 3 9 8 SIU 1 Remove Rear cover A SIU assembly x4 x7 3 9 9 IPU 1 Remove Rear cover Controller unit SIO 2 Remove A FFC cover x2 B IPU x3 x4 FFC x2 ...

Page 191: ...U x7 3 9 10 HDD 1 Before you replace the HDD Insert an SD card in SD card slot 2 lower slot Go into the SP mode Do SP5846 51 to upload the address book data to the SD card If the HDD is damaged you may not be able to retrieve this data from the HDD 2 Remove the controller board See Controller Board ...

Page 192: ...th the customer for disposal or safe keeping The HDD may contain proprietary or classified Confidential Secret information Specifically the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but it can possibly be recovered with ille...

Page 193: ...each paper tray before you start these adjustments Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP2 902 No 10 to print the test pattern for the following procedures Set SP 2 902 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station and adjust them using SP1 001 2 Check the side to side registration for each ...

Page 194: ...A Leading Edge Registration B Side to side Registration Blank Margin If the leading edge side to side registration cannot be adjusted within the specifications adjust the leading left side edge blank margin 1 Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins and adjust them using the following SP modes SP mode Specification Trailing edge SP2 101 2 3 4 3 2 mm Right edge SP2 101 6 2 2 5 1 5 ...

Page 195: ...P2 101 5 2 1 5 mm Trailing edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 7 2 2 mm Left edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 8 2 1 5 mm Right edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 9 2 2 5 1 5 mm A Trailing Edge Blank Margin B Right Edge Blank Margin C Leading Edge Blank Margin D Left Edge Blank Margin Main Scan Magnification 1 Print the single dot grid pattern SP2 902 no 5 ...

Page 196: ...Check whether the trimming area pattern SP2 902 No 10 is printed as a parallelogram as shown If it is do the following 2 Remove the laser unit A see Laser Unit 3 Remove the bracket B x2 4 Install the adjusting cam C P N A2309003 5 Secure the adjustment bracket D P N A2679002 using the screw which was used for bracket B However do not tighten the screws at this time 6 Adjusts the laser unit positio...

Page 197: ... an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments Registration Platen Mode 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the leading edge and side to side registration and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary SP mode Leading Edge SP4 010 Side to side SP4 011 A Leading Edge Registration B Side to side Registration Magnifica...

Page 198: ...2 Check the magnification ratio Use SP4 008 Scanner Sub Scan Magnification to adjust if necessary Specification 0 9 3 10 3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Registration A Leading Edge Registration B Side to side Registration Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3 DLT paper 1 Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed ...

Page 199: ...he temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary The specification is 1 SP mode Sub scan magnification SP6 006 5 3 10 4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION After clearing the memory or if the touch panel detection function is not working correctly follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen ...

Page 200: ...the mark at the lower right of the screen after it appears 5 Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear where the screen is touched press Cancel and repeat from Step 2 6 When you are finished press OK on the screen or press on the ten key pad 7 Touch Exit on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu and...

Page 201: ...TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 202: ......

Page 203: ...operation panel only when the defective feature is selected Turn the operation switch or main switch off and on C The SC history is updated The machine can be operated as usual The SC will not be displayed Only the SC history is updated D Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed on the operation panel These are re displayed if the error occurs again Turn the operation switch off an...

Page 204: ...sconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the machine Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB If a motor lock error occurs check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or sensors When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode the machine cannot display the SC number If this occurs check t...

Page 205: ...h voltage power supply harness loose broken defective SBU defective BCU defective SIO defective Exposure lamp error 1 101 2 D The standard white level setting dropped below the specified range during scanning White plate dirty Spurious electrical noise on power supply line Exposure lamp connection loose broken defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer connection loose broken defective Lamp...

Page 206: ...or 141 D Black level correction could not be set properly during automatic adjustment Harnesses at the SBU IPU BCU loose broken defective SBU defective IPU defective BCU defective White level correction error 142 D White level correction could not be set properly during automatic adjustment Harnesses at SBU IPU BCU loose broken defective Spurious electrical noise on power supply line White plate d...

Page 207: ...anner unit not operating Harness connection at SBU iPU BCU SIO loose broken defective SBU defective IPU defective BCU defective SIO Defective SBU connection error 144 1 D Connection to the SBU could not be confirmed possibly due to a defect in the BCU detection board SBU serial communication error 144 2 D Poor SBU power supply caused by SIO or BCU detection board defective SBU GASBU reset error 14...

Page 208: ...lation of Copy Data Security CDS Unit CDS unit not correct type for the machine CDS unit defective Polygon motor error 1 ON timeout 202 D The polygon mirror motor did not reach the targeted operating speed within 10 sec after turning on or changing speed Polygon motor error 1 OFF timeout 203 D The polygon mirror motor did not leave READY status within 3 sec after polygon motor switched off Polygon...

Page 209: ...U generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on 231 D FGATE OFF error The FGATE signal did not go off within the prescribed time The BCU generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on BCU Controller board harness loose or broken BCU defective Controller board defective 240 LD error The IPU detected a...

Page 210: ... defective ID sensor calibration Error 2 351 B The following conditions occurred simultaneously when the ID sensor pattern was calibrated during printing Vsg 5V PWM 0 LED current drop ID sensor dirty or defective ID sensor harness disconnected or connector damaged BCU board defective High voltage power supply board power pack defective 353 B ID sensor LED current error Error occurred during automa...

Page 211: ...about the cause of the problem please refer to SC350 to 354 above ID sensor dirty or defective ID sensor harness disconnected or connector damaged BCU defective High voltage power supply board power pack defective 389 C TD sensor error 1 TD sensor output was less than 0 5V or more than 0 5V 10 times in succession If the fax unit is installed this SC is issued immediately If the fax unit is not ins...

Page 212: ...loose broken TD sensor harness loose broken ID sensor defective TD sensor defective 398 B PCU error South Korea only Illegal PCU unit Install the correct type of PCU 399 B Illegal toner bottle South Korea only The installed toner bottle installed is not intended for use with this machine Install the correct type of toner bottle 401 B Transfer roller leak error 1 A transfer roller current leak sign...

Page 213: ...ctive 490 B Toner supply motor leak error More than 1 ampere supplied to the toner supply motor for longer than 200 ms Toner supply motor defective 500 B Main motor lock The machine detected motor lock motor is not operating correctly An obstruction has blocked operation of the main motor Main motor harness loose or broken Main motor or main motor driver board defective 501 B 1st paper tray lift m...

Page 214: ...n overload Paper tray motor connection loose disconnected or damaged Paper tray motor defective LCT rear fence drive error 508 B The return position sensor is not activated after the rear fence drive motor has been on to lower the tandem tray for 8 seconds An obstruction jammed paper paper scraps etc has jammed the rear fence or motor Rear fence motor connection loose disconnected or damaged Rear ...

Page 215: ... of the tray lift motor Lower limit sensor disconnected or defective Obstruction that causes overload on the drive mechanism 541 A Fusing thermistor open center The temperature of the hot roller remained below 0o C for 5 sec at the center of the hot roller Fusing thermistor out of its position because of incorrect installation Fusing thermistor disconnected or defective Power supply not within rat...

Page 216: ...on PSU PSU defective BCU board defective Fusing thermistor defective Power supply voltage unstable 545 A Fusing overheat error 3 center After warmup the center of the hot roller attained full operating temperature and maintained this temperature for 10 sec without the hot roller rotating Center hot roller thermistor installed incorrectly disconnected Center hot roller thermistor defective 547 B Ze...

Page 217: ...rmistor detected a fusing temperature over 230 C for 5 sec at the center of the hot roller TRIAC short on PSU PSU defective BCU board defective Fusing thermistor defective 554 A Fusing overheat error 2 end A fusing temperature over 250 C is detected at the center of the hot roller by the fusing temperature monitor circuit in the BCU board The power was interrupted for more than 0 3 sec TRIAC short...

Page 218: ...s after the paper feeds correctly Note This SC is issued only if SP1159 is set to 1 Remove the paper jam in the fusing unit Make sure that the paper path in the fusing unit is clear 590 B Exhaust fan motor error The CPU detects an exhaust fan lock signal for more than 3 5 seconds Poor connection of the exhaust fan motor Too much load on the motor drive 620 B Communication error between IPU and ADF...

Page 219: ...ame is sent to the device an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms and is not received after 3 retries Serial line from the device to the main machine is unstable disconnected or defective Key card counter device error 2 633 B During communication with the device the MCU received a break Low signal Serial line from the device to the main machine is unstable disconnected or defective Key card co...

Page 220: ...file is corrupted or the wrong type file Make sure the eccm mod file is in the root folder of the SD card Note The usercode files are created with the User Setting Tool IDissuer exe 641 D Engine Controller Communication Error Non Response There was no response to a frame sent from the controller board to the engine Turn the machine power off on 650 B Communication error of the remote service modem...

Page 221: ...e time Same as 001 011 Disable the NIC with SP5985 1 Modem board error The modem board does not work properly even though the setting of the modem board is installed with a dial up connection Same as 001 012 Install the modem board Check and reset the modem board setting with SP5816 Replace the modem board Incorrect dial up connection 001 Program parameter error 002 Program execution error An unex...

Page 222: ...fective 672 D Controller to operation panel communication error at startup After powering on the machine the communication circuit between the controller and the operation panel is not opened or communication with controller is interrupted after a normal startup Controller stalled Controller board installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose or defective 687 D M...

Page 223: ...P sensor dirty loose defective Rear jogger fence motor defective 723 B Feed out belt motor error The feed out belt did not return to the home position within the prescribed time Feed out belt motor drive is obstructed jammed paper paper scraps etc Feed out belt motor drive obstructed jammed paper paper scraps etc Motor harness loose or broken Feed out belt HP sensor dirty disconnected broken Motor...

Page 224: ...error The corner stapler motor in the 1000 sheet finisher is not operating Staple jam Number of sheets in stack exceeds allowed number of sheets for stapling Stapler motor obstructed Stapler motor defective 742 B Stapler movement motor The stapler movement motor in the 1000 sheet finisher is not operating Stapler or motor drive is blocked by obstruction Motor harness loose or broken Stapler HP sen...

Page 225: ...ensor dirty harness loose broken Motor defective Stack height sensor defective 751 B Stack pressure solenoid error The stack pressure solenoid in the finisher is not operating Solenoid harness loose broken Solenoid obstructed Stack height sensor dirty harness loose broke Solenoid defective Stack height sensor defective 760 B Finisher punch motor error The punch HP sensor did not activate within th...

Page 226: ...hin the prescribed time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Motor harness loose broken Motor drive obstructed Motor defective 764 B Paper position slide motor error The paper position sensor detected movement of the slide but the slide was not detected at the home position within the prescribed time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and t...

Page 227: ...bridge unit Poor connection between the finisher and mainframe Bridge unit harness damaged or defective Bridge unit defective 792 B Finisher unit error The machine cannot communicate with the bridge unit but not the finisher Poor connection between the finisher and mainframe Finisher harness damaged or defective Finisher unit defective 816 D Energy saver I O sub system error Energy saver sub syste...

Page 228: ...394 interface error IEEE1394 interface board defective Controller board defective 853 D Wireless LAN board error 1 At startup the wireless LAN board could be accessed but the wireless LAN board IEEE 802 11b or Bluetooth could not access the controller board Wireless LAN board not installed when the machine was turned on 854 D Wireless LAN board error 2 The board that holds the wireless LAN board c...

Page 229: ...SB I F cannot be used The USB driver can generate three types of errors RX CRC and STALL errors Only the STALL error can generate this SC code USB 2 0 disconnected Controller board defective 858 A Data encryption conversion error A serious error occurred during data encryption 0 A Key acquisition error Replace the controller board 1 A HDD key setting error Turn the machine power off on If the erro...

Page 230: ...ctive HDD power connector loose or defective HDD not formatted HDD defective Replace the controller board 861 B HDD error 2 The HDD did not enter the ready status within 30 sec after power on Cable between HDC and HDD loose or defective HDD power connector loose or defective HDD defective Replace the controller board 863 B HDD error 3 Startup without HD data lead Data stored on the hard disk is no...

Page 231: ...rd in the boot slot when the machine was turned on was removed while the machine power was on Insert the SD card then turn the machine off and on SD card error 3 SD card access 868 D An error occurred while an SD card was used SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective Controller board defective Note If you want to try to reformat the SD card use SD Formatter Ver 1 1 870 B Address Book Data ...

Page 232: ...e HDD Do SP5832 8 Format HDD Mail TX Data to initialize the HDD Replace the HDD Delete All error 1 HDD 874 D A data error was detected for the HDD NVRAM after the Delete All option was used Note The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit D362 running from an SD card Turn the main switch off on and try the operation again Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit again For more see...

Page 233: ...tivated Replace the NVRAM Reinstall the DOS from the SD card SD card defective TPM electronic recognition error 878 D The main machine firmware failed to recognize TPM because USB flash is not operating or a system module was updated incorrectly Replace the controller board 880 D File format converter error A request for access to the File Format Converter MLB was not answered within the specified...

Page 234: ...Font not on the SD card 925 D Network File Error The file that manages NetFile is corrupted and operation cannot continue Software defective Files on the HDD corrupted Software performance error D The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation due to 1 software bug 2 incorrect internal parameter 3 insufficient working memory 990 Turn the machine power off on Reinstall the controller and...

Page 235: ...lection error Application selected by the operator did not start or end normally due to a software problem An option required by the application may not be installed Confirm which devices are required for the application Make sure all devices are configured correctly If the problem is with the fax unit the nesting of the fax group may be too complicated Application start error No applications star...

Page 236: ...ist Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data Symptom Possible Causes Action taken Summary sheet SP mode Printer SP SP1 004 Print Summary SMC All SP5 990 001 SMC Logging SP5 990 004 Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs All data displayed on the screen SC code error co...

Page 237: ... the controller waits for the initial settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self diagnostic test program The self diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU memory HDD and so on An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition ...

Page 238: ...Self Diagnostic Mode D017 D018 D019 D020 4 36 SM Self Diagnostic Test Flow Chart ...

Page 239: ...Also the printer scanner unit and the optional Centronics IEEE1284 interface must be installed Part No Name G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector Executing Detailed Self Diagnosis Follow this procedure to do the detailed self diagnosis 1 Switch off the machine and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I F port 2 Hold down the button press and hold down the button and then while pre...

Page 240: ...100 0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock 200 0 MHz Board Type 7 ASIC Version 1397306160 RTC Existence existence RAM Capacity 100 663296 MB HDD Existence existence HDD Model Total Counter 0001000 Program No MAIN ACP82XXXX ENGINE Ver1 96 LCDC V1 39 PI ADF B3515620B SIB B0045383 FIN FIN_SDL BANK A6825150 LCT MBX FCU DPX Error List SCCODE ERROR CODE SC CODE ERROR CODE SC CODE ERROR CODE SC CODE ERROR CODE SC835 1...

Page 241: ...m of the stack Double feeding occurs when the bottom plate is exerting too much pressure on the paper remaining in the tray To correct this increase the length of time the motor runs in reverse to lower the tray This is a minus value Failure to feed occurs when the bottom plate is not exerting enough pressure on the paper remaining in the tray To correct this increase the length of time the motor ...

Page 242: ...Skewed Image D017 D018 D019 D020 4 40 SM 4 4 SKEWED IMAGE Do the following to fix a skewed image problem ...

Page 243: ...e shooting 4 5 IMAGE PROBLEMS 4 5 1 SKEWED TRAPEZOID AND PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES Skewed Images The image s leading and trailing edges are parallel The image s left and right edges are also parallel But all four sides are not parallel with the paper edge ...

Page 244: ...Image Problems D017 D018 D019 D020 4 42 SM Trapezoid Images Only the image s trailing edge is not parallel with the paper edge The other 3 sides are parallel to the paper s edges ...

Page 245: ...D017 D018 D019 D020 Trouble shooting Parallelogram Images Like skewed images the leading trailing edges and left right edges are parallel to each other But the leading and trailing edges are not parallel to the paper s edges ...

Page 246: ...Image Problems D017 D018 D019 D020 4 44 SM 4 5 2 CHECKING IMAGES WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN ...

Page 247: ...and the paper stack 2 Adjust the paper buckle SP1 003 1 and 2 2 Platen mode check Set an original flush against the left and rear scales and make a copy Does the image come out as a parallelogram No Yes Attach the Scanner Holder a supporter that is normally attached during shipping OR Do Procedure A below 3 ADF mode check Feed an original through the ADF Is the image skewed No Yes Do the front and...

Page 248: ...osition adjustments that are necessary Do Procedure B below Procedure complete Procedure A 1 Remove the rear and left covers then the left scanner cover 2 Check to see if there is a gap between the scanner unit holder and frame at A 3 If there is no gap the left front section of the scanner unit is lower than the standard position ...

Page 249: ... mm gap 6 Tighten the 7 screws 7 Insert a washer 07080050 1 mm thick into gap A 8 Attach the washer in its position with an adhesive that sets quickly This washer will also absorb small amounts of shock 9 Check if the parallelogram image still appears Procedure B 1 Remove the ADF A machine rear cover scanner left cover and scanner rear cover ...

Page 250: ...0 5 mm or more Add a spacer t 0 5 to 0 8 between the hinge bracket mainframe and ADF left hinge to lift the left side of the ADF or Adjust the stepped height difference between the hinge bracket and scanner housing until it is within 0 0 3 mm This is necessary because skew occurs when the hinge bracket more than 0 3 mm lower than the scanner housing ...

Page 251: ... Fusing Unit b Tighten the left fixing screw while you push up the unit s left side until it stops 3 If the image is a pattern B trapezoid do the same for the unit s right side 4 If the image is still printed out as a trapezoid do Procedure 2 below Procedure 2 Minor Adjustment of the Fusing Unit Position front to rear 1 Remove the fusing unit then add a washer t 0 5 to 1 6 to the front fixing scre...

Page 252: ... wrinkling in the paper Still NG Go to the next step OK Adjustment Complete 4 Remove the fusing unit and all the washers added in steps 1 and 2 above 5 Then add washer s in the same way for the rear side Recommended Washers t 0 5 07080040Z or 07080040G t 0 8 07080050Z or 07080050G Correcting Parallelogram Images For the procedure see Parallelogram Image Problems ...

Page 253: ...perly Open The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the 1st paper tray 1st Paper End Sensor 307 1 BCU Shorted The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the 1st paper tray Open 1st Paper Height Sensor 1 310 1 BCU Shorted The CPU cannot determine the paper near end condition properly Open 1st Paper Height Sensor 2 310 4 BCU Shorted The CPU cannot determine ...

Page 254: ...indicator lights even if paper is placed in the 2nd paper tray 2nd Paper End Sensor 308 1 BCU Shorted The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the 2nd paper tray Open 2nd Paper Height Sensor 1 310 7 BCU Shorted The CPU cannot determine the paper near end condition properly Open 2nd Paper Height Sensor 2 310 10 BCU Shorted The CPU cannot determine the paper near end condi...

Page 255: ... detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Open APS Sensor 4 Original Length 223 10 SIO Shorted The CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Open APS Sensor 5 Original Length 223 13 SIO Shorted The CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and ARE do not function correctly Open Open Cover is displayed even the cover is ...

Page 256: ...ven if there is no paper Open The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the right upper cover is opened Duplex Unit Set Sensor 859 9 BCU Shorted The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right upper cover is closed Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Exit Sensor 703 4 CKB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Open ID Sensor 321 1 BCU Short...

Page 257: ... BCU Shorted The TD sensor initial setting procedure is performed whenever the front cover is closed Open The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the 1st paper tray Paper End Sensor Bypass 860 3 BCU Shorted The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the 1st paper tray Open The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the 1st paper tray Paper ...

Page 258: ...per overfull condition exist Paper Overflow Sensor 703 1 CKB Shorted The paper overflow message is displayed Open LED does not light even if paper is in 1 bin tray Paper Present Sensor 330 1 BCU Shorted LED lights even if paper is not in 1 bin tray Open Paper Size Sensor Bypass 860 6 BCU Shorted The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made Open Paper Size ...

Page 259: ...layed Scanner HP Sensor 228 1 SIO Shorted The CPU does not detect the scanner home position and the scanner motor does not stop Open Shift Sensor 903 1 STB Shorted SC770 is displayed Open TD Sensor 327 1 BCU Shorted SC390 is displayed Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Upper Relay Sensor 307 4 BCU Shorted The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper An SC c...

Page 260: ...cator is not lit even if the front cover is opened Front Door Safety Switch 321 3 BCU Shorted The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the front cover is closed Open The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the right upper cover is opened Right Upper Cover Switch 321 8 BCU Shorted The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right upper cover is closed Open The Cover Open indicator is not lit eve...

Page 261: ... A 125 V 1 A 250V Anti condensation Tray Heater does not turn on FU4 6 3 A 125 V 6 3 A 250V Optional finisher bridge unit and shift tray does not work then SC792 is displayed FU5 6 3 A 125 V 6 3 250 V All motors do not rotate The Cover Open and SC indicators light FU6 6 3 A 125 V 6 3 A 250V The touch panel does not turn on and all motors except scanner motor do not rotate FU7 5 A 250 V 5 A 250 V N...

Page 262: ......

Page 263: ...SERVICE TABLES ...

Page 264: ......

Page 265: ...If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on It is not necessary to ask t...

Page 266: ...ering the Service Mode 1 Press the Clear Mode S key 2 Use the keypad to enter 107 3 Hold down the Clear Stop D key for at least 3 seconds To enter the Normal Service Mode 1 On the touch panel press Copy SP To enter the Special Service Mode 1 Hold down the button then press Copy SP 2 Press Exit two times to return to the copy window Use SP2902 to print a test pattern see Test Pattern Printing SP Mo...

Page 267: ...eft to the previous or next selection in the list Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing 1 In the SP mode select the test print and then press Copy Window 2 Use the copy window copier mode to select the appropriate settings paper size etc for the test print 3 Press the Start button q to execute the test print 4 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode screen and repeat...

Page 268: ...mpted to complete the selection press Yes 6 If you need to perform a test print press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print Press Start q twice and then press SP Mode highlighted in the copy window to return to the SP mode display 7 When you are finished press Exit twice to return to the copy window 5 1 3 COMMONLY USED SP CODES AND FEATURES This section is ...

Page 269: ... to open the copy window and then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 4 Press Start q twice Ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 5 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display No Test Pattern 0 None 1 Vertical Line 1dot 2 Horizontal Line 1dot 3 Vertical Line 2 dot 4 Horizontal Line 2 dot 5 Grid Pattern 1dot 6 Independent 1 dot 7 Independent 2 d...

Page 270: ...te Stripe 22 Grayscale Horizontal Vertical White Stripe 23 100 White Coverage 24 Trimming Area OR Outside Data See SP 4417 in the SP table for a different set of test patterns SMC Data Lists SP5990 1 Open SP mode 5990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print SMC System Parameter and Data Lists 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 UP Mode Data List 4 Logging Data List...

Page 271: ...orea Only SP2990 1 5 Original Toner ID South Korea Only SP2991 1 5 Original Toner Counter South Korea Only SP5811 1 Machine serial number SP5907 Plug Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting Normally this SP mode should not be used This procedure is necessary only after replacing the NVRAM or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is damaged 1 Enter the SP mode do SP5801 and press the n...

Page 272: ...plication Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes 10 Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails and initializes the job login ID 11 NCS Network Control Service Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also SmartNetMonitor for Admin WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings 12 R FA...

Page 273: ...When you open this SP a small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0 s and 1 s The meaning of the display is as follows 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Paper not detected 1 Paper detected Bit Description 7 L2 6 L3 5 W1 4 W2 3 Not Used 2 L1 1 Not Used 0 Not Used ...

Page 274: ...l be fed automatically 7 Check the width of the nip band A around the center of the OHP The relationship between the position of the pressure spring and the width is as follows 1 Pressure spring position Nip band width Upper default position 5 2 0 5 mm Lower 5 3 0 5 mm 2 Envelope feed mode green lever down at the default pressure spring position 4 7 0 5 mm If the width is out of the above specific...

Page 275: ...want to reset the system settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit Copier Setting Reset The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Press and hold down and then touch Copier Document Server Settings 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copi...

Page 276: ...with each key press italics Comments added for reference Value stored in NVRAM After a RAM reset this default value factory setting is restored 1111 An SP number set in bold denotes a Special Service Program mode setting that appears only after entering the SP mode by pressing and Copy SP together See Service Program Mode Operation DFU Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Japan only The ...

Page 277: ...ray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 Optional PFU Tray 1 or LCT 4 Tray 4 Optional PFU Tray 2 5 By pass 6 Duplex Side 2 Adjusts the printing side to side registration from each paper feed station using the Trimming Area Pattern SP2902 Pattern No 10 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Use the key to toggle between and before entering the value The specification is 2 1 5 mm See Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment f...

Page 278: ...using on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete this may occur if the room is cold Fusing Temperature Control DFU 1104 0 to 1 1 1 0 Hysterysis Control 1 Normal Control 1105 Fusing Temperature Adjustment 1 Roller Center 2 Roller Ends Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and both ends of the hot roller for normal printing 120 to 200 180 1 C step 3 Energy Saver Adjusts the fusing temperature at...

Page 279: ...up No of Pages In this machine fusing temperature is kept 10 C higher than the normal temperature for a number of pages after the machine has warmed up This SP selects the number of pages made at this temperature See Detailed Section Descriptions Fusing for more details 0 to 10 3 1 page step 9 After Warming up Time In this machine fusing temperature is kept 10 C higher than the normal temperature ...

Page 280: ... the power supply fluctuation caused by the fusing lamp turning on is less often 0 1 s 1 2 s Default 0 N America Taiwan 1 Europe Asia Fusing Nip Band Check 1109 Checks the fusing nip band 1 Execution Idling Rotation Time 0 to 120 60 1 sec 2 Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109 001 Pre Idling Time 5 to 30 10 1 sec 3 Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit fo...

Page 281: ...ed 0 to 10 6 1 mm step 2 Tray 1 Feed 3 Other Trays 0 to 10 0 1 mm step 1907 Timing Adjustment DFU 1908 F1 Plate Adj Upper Tray Main Machine Standard 1909 F2 Plate Adj Lower Tray Main Machine Standard 1910 F3 Plate Adj Upper Tray PTU Option 1911 F4 Plate Adj Lower Tray PTU Option These SP codes adjust the initial amount of pressure that the bottom plate exerts on the bottom of the stack that presse...

Page 282: ...l notation in the display indicates the default value for the setting A positive number indicates the length of time ms the lift motor runs forward to raise the bottom plate and increase pressure A negative number indicates the length of time ms the lift motor runs in reverse to lower the bottom plate and reduce pressure Please note that the Initial settings for some settings are negative reverse ...

Page 283: ...for each tray Tray 1 Upper Tray Main Machine Tray 2 Lower Tray Main Machine Tray 3 LCT Tray or Upper Tray Paper Tray Unit Tray 4 Lower Tray Paper Tray Unit 1 Size 1 B5 Exe Landscape 2 Size 2 A5 HLT Landscape 3 Size 3 A4 LT 4 Size 4 A4 LG 5 Size 5 A3 LT 0 to 1 0 1 0 ISO A3 A4 A5 etc 1 USA DLT LT EXE etc Note Landscape means LEF Long Edge Feed Max Fusing Lamp Duty DFU 1991 These SP codes are debuggi...

Page 284: ...D018 D019 D020 5 20 SM Heater Forced Off DFU 1996 These are debugging tools 1 Starting Temperature Center 2 Starting Temperature Side 150 to 180 180 5 deg 3 Time Center 4 Time Side 0 to 5 0 1 5 After Printing 0 to 5 1 1 ...

Page 285: ...ller when making the Vsdp ID sensor pattern for charge roller bias correction The actual charge roller voltage is this value plus the value of SP2001 1 0 to 400 200 1 V step Temporary Input 3 Inputs the charge roller voltage temporarily for test purposes Do not change the value 0 to 2500 0 1 V step 2005 Charge Bias Correction Vsdp Min 1 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller corre...

Page 286: ...t for details 0 0 to 9 0 3 0 0 1 mm step Trailing Edge Small Paper 2 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of length 216 mm or less The specification is 3 2 mm See Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for details 0 0 to 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step Trailing Edge Middle Paper 3 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of length 216 1 to 297 mm The specification is 3 2 mm See Replace...

Page 287: ... value of SP2101 2 or 3 or 4 The specification is 3 2 mm See Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for details 0 0 to 9 0 1 2 0 1 mm step Rear Left Side Duplex 2nd Side 8 Adjusts the left side erase margin on the reverse side of duplex copies The actual left side erase margin on the reverse side is this value plus the value of SP2101 5 The specification is 2 1 5 mm See Replacement and Adjustm...

Page 288: ...step LD Power Adjustment DFU 2103 50 to 170 129 1 step Adjusts the LD power Do not change the value Test Mode dpi 2110 Sets the scanning resolution dpi DFU See below 8 0to18 0 400x400 dpi 4 300x300 dpi 8 600x600 dpi 2201 Development Bias Adjust Printing 1 Adjusts the development bias during printing This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint copies appear due to an aging drum 1500 to 200...

Page 289: ...rge roller before the development bias is turned off This SP adjusts the time for applying the charge 0 to 150 80 1 ms step Development Bias DFU 2 Adjusts the development bias off time 120 to 120 0 1ms step PCU Reverse Interval 2211 Adjusts the PCU reverse interval for cleaning during a job When the machine has made this number of copies in the middle of a job the machine reverses to clean the edg...

Page 290: ...uring copying from a paper tray when the user uses the Normal paper setting If the user normally feeds thicker paper from a paper tray use a higher setting 0 2 μA 1 0 μA 2 2 μA 3 4μA Thick Thin Paper 2 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during copying from the by pass tray These settings are also used if the 2nd tray is used and special paper is selected If the user normally feeds ...

Page 291: ...he temperature measured inside the machine just after power on by the thermistor on the SBCU board the last time that the fusing unit was less than 40 C just after the machine was switched on The transfer current is corrected in accordance with this value Developer Initialization 2801 Initializes the developer and resets the TD and ID sensor outputs to their defaults Do this SP after you fill the ...

Page 292: ...eveloper initialization New PCU Check DFU 2804 This SP determines whether the machine is set to recognize a new PCU 0 to 1 0 1 0 New PCU recognition on 1 New PCU recognition off 2901 Separation Voltage Adj Front Leading Edge 1 Adjusts the voltage that is applied to the separation plate during printing at the leading edge of the paper on the front side If the copies have pawl marks at the leading e...

Page 293: ...number of the test pattern that you want to print When adjusting the printing registration select no 10 Trimming Area Pattern 0 to 24 0 1 step Test Patterns for SP2902 0 None 13 Checker Flag Pattern 1 Vertical Line 1 dot 14 Black Band Vertical 2 Horizontal Line 1 dot 15 Independent Pattern 4 dot 3 Vertical Line 2 dot 16 Grayscale Horizontal 4 Horizontal Line 2 dot 17 Grayscale Vertical 5 Grid Patt...

Page 294: ... vertical lines will continue past the bottom of the table This SP prevents this problem 0 0 to 1 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Interval 2 Changes the interval for the image shift specified by SP2906 1 0 to 10 0 1 page step 2907 Filter Setting Adjusts the line width for the copy mode The default setting disables this function A number smaller than the default makes lines thinner a number larger than the defau...

Page 295: ...e main scan magnification in copy mode when the machine feeds the paper in the short edge feed orientation Printer Short Edge Feed 2 Adjusts the main scan magnification in printer mode when the machine feeds the paper in the short edge feed orientation Copy Long Edge Feed 3 Adjusts the main scan magnification in copy mode when the machine feeds the paper in the long edge feed orientation Printer L...

Page 296: ...tops 10 s at the end of a job Note If set at 0 the polygon motor never turns off during stand by However when the machine goes into energy saver mode the polygon motor turns off regardless of this timer 1 Idling Time Adj 2 Post Idling Time Adj 0 to 60 10 1 Toner Supply Mode 2921 Selects the toner supply mode 0 Sensor 1 1 Sensor 2 2 Fixed 1 3 Fixed 2 4 Sensor 3 Normally only use setting 0 Change to...

Page 297: ...3 Increasing this value increases the toner supply motor on time So use a high value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black See Toner Density Control for more details 0 to 7 0 1 step 0 t 1 2t 2 4t 3 8t 4 12t 5 16t 6 On continuously 7 0 s t 200 ms Standard Vt DFU 2926 Adjusts Vts Vt for a new PCU The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sen...

Page 298: ...be attracted to the drum when the toner runs out which may damage the drum 2929 Vref Adjustment Upper Limit 1 Adjusts the upper limit for Vref 0 5 to 3 5 3 10 0 05 V step Lower Limit 2 Adjusts the lower limit for Vref 0 5 to 3 5 1 40 0 05 V step TD Sensor Manual Setting 2930 Adjusts the TD sensor output DFU 0 to 5 0 0V 0 05V step TD V wt Setting 2931 Adjusts the TD sensor sensitivity coefficient S...

Page 299: ... Sensor Initialization 2935 Performs the ID sensor initial setting Press Execute on the touch panel to start Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor Original PCU ID South Korea only 2989 Displays the ISSUER CODE of the loaded PCU The history of the PCU ID codes is stored in NVRAM for display 1 Latest Most current code in use 2 Last 1 3 Last 2 4 Last 3 5 Last 4 Up to four iss...

Page 300: ...orea only 2991 Displays the page counts for the issuer code history 0 to 65535 0 1 1 Latest 2 Last 1 3 Last 2 4 Last 3 5 Last 4 This SP displays the page counts for each successive issuer code See SP2990 above Copies After TD Sensor Error 2992 Selects the number of copies that can be made after a TD sensor error has been detected When the machine copies this amount an SC condition will occur If th...

Page 301: ...ed after the machine is turned on or after the machine returns to full operation from the energy saver or auto off mode 0 to 255 30 1 degree Number of Pages 2 The machine makes an ID sensor pattern after the specified number of prints has been made 0 to 999 300 1 page step 3 Job End Interrupt Determines when the ID sensor reads the ID sensor pattern 0 Job End Read pattern at job end 1 Interrupt Re...

Page 302: ...wear on the PCU 0to100 50 1 sheets Note This SP does not execute for the first copy after power on or when the machine returns from the energy save or auto off mode This SP setting does cannot correct poor copies if there is a problem with the TD sensor 2997 Standard Vt Factory Only DFU 2998 PCU Reverse Rotation Time DFU Wait Time 1 Adjusts the waiting time for starting to rotate the drum in rever...

Page 303: ...on of the drum 0 to 99 60 1 This SP is adjusted in units of 6 ms 1 step 6 ms 2 steps 12 ms etc If 0 is selected the drum stops reverse rotation immediately Note Adjust the SP only if the PCU makes noise during braking when the drum rotation slows To reduce or eliminate the noise select a lower setting to reduce the braking time ...

Page 304: ...SP3xxx D017 D018 D019 D020 5 40 SM 5 4 SP3XXX There are no Group 3 SP codes for this machine ...

Page 305: ...on 4011 Adjusts side to side registration for scanning Press to toggle C 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 0 1 mm step M 4 2 to 4 2 0 0 0 1 mm step As you enter negative values the image will disappear at the left and as you enter positive values the image will appear at the left 4012 Scanner Erase Margin Scale Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning in book mode and ADF mode Do not adjust this unless the...

Page 306: ...P Detection Disable Touch Execute to start this feature Press the D Clear Stop key to stop ADF Scan Glass Dust Check 4020 This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can cause black lines in copies If dust is detected a system banner message is displayed but processing does not stop Check On Off Change 1 Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of ...

Page 307: ...ued when you see not black streaks in copies lower the setting Note Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path If the dust is removed by passing originals this is not detected and the warning remains on 3 Correction Level Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF 0 to 4 0 1 step 0 Off 1 Weakest 2 Weak 3 Strong 4 Strong...

Page 308: ...Erase Margin 4400 These SPs set the area to be masked during platen book mode scanning 1 Book Leading Edge 2 Book Trailing Edge 3 Book Left 4 Book Right 0 to 3 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 5 ADF Leading Edge 0 to 3 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 7 ADF Right 8 ADF Left 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step IPU Test Pattern Selects the IPU test Pattern 0 to 28 0 1 0 Scanned image 15 Gray pattern 1 1 Gradation main scan A 16 Gray pattern ...

Page 309: ...patch 16 1 25 Gray Scale 18 text 11 Gray patch 16 2 26 Gray Scale 18 photo 12 Gray patch 64 27 Gray Scale 256 text 13 Grid pattern 2 28 Gray Scale 256 photo 14 Color patch K ICI Output Selection 4429 Adjusts the ICI density level 1 Copy 2 Scanner 3 Fax 32 to 255 128 1 step 255 Strongest density Scan Image Path Detection 4450 Determines the method of image path detection 1 Black Reduction ON OFF Sw...

Page 310: ...for a total of 48 parameters 1 4 RY Phase Option R G B 5 8 YR Phase Option R G B 9 12 YG Phase Option R G B 13 16 GY Phase Option R G B 17 20 GC Phase Option R G B 21 24 CG Phase Option R G B 25 28 CB Phase Option R G B 29 32 BC Phase Option R G B 33 36 BM Phase Option R G B 37 40 MB Phase Option R G B 41 44 MR Phase Option R G B 45 48 RM Phase Option R G B Specifies the printer vector correction ...

Page 311: ...ties Typically you may see very narrow width and spacing between black and white areas MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail 6 Smoothing Selects the level of smoothing for originals that contain dithered images 0 to 7 4 0 step 0 Default Off 7 Strongest 7 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image 1 to 255 128 1 1 Weakest 128 Default 255 Strongest 8 Contrast Sets the overal...

Page 312: ...e areas MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail 6 Smoothing Selects the level of smoothing for originals that contain dithered images 0 to 7 4 0 step 0 Default Off 7 Strongest 7 Brightness Sets the overall brightness of the image 1 to 255 128 1 1 Weakest 128 Default 255 Strongest 8 Contrast Sets the overall contrast of the image 1 to 255 128 1 1 Weakest 128 Default 255 Strongest 9 In...

Page 313: ...Data Set Not used AGC Execution DFU 4603 Executes the AGC 1 HP Detection Enable 2 HP Detection Disable FGATE Open Close 4604 Opens or closes the FGATE signal This SP automatically returns to the default status close after exiting this SP 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Note When the registration sensor goes ON the BCU generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD units As soon as the LD units recei...

Page 314: ...o 255 128 1 digit step 2 Latest RO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 3 Latest RE Color Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 4 Latest RO Color Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circu...

Page 315: ...lays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 2 Latest GO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 3 Latest GE Color Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board co...

Page 316: ...value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Gain Adjustment Display 4628 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 1 Latest RE Color 2 Latest RO Color 3 Latest RE BW 4 Latest RO BW 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Display 4629 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 1 Latest GE...

Page 317: ... 1st Color 2 Loop Count 1st B W 1st adjustment 0 to 20 0 1 step 3 Loop Count 2nd Color 4 Loop Count 2nd B W 2nd adjustment 0 to 20 0 1 step SBU White Level Loop 4641 Displays the white level adjustment time for each mode 1 Loop Count Color 2 Loop Count B W 0 to 20 0 1 step SBU Timeout Error 4646 Use this SP to determine whether the automatic scanner adjustment loop has exceeded the prescribed numb...

Page 318: ... adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 4 Previous RO Color Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous RE BW Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printi...

Page 319: ...Color Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 4 Previous GO Color Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous GE BW Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even gre...

Page 320: ...Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 4 Previous BO Color Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous BE BW Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal...

Page 321: ...r Red 1 Previous RE Color 2 Previous RO Color 3 Previous RE BW 4 Previous RO BW 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Display 4659 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 1 Previous GE Color 2 Previous GO Color 3 Previous GE BW 4 Previous GO BW 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Display 4660 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the con...

Page 322: ... Previous RO Color Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous RE BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 6 Previous RO BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value roug...

Page 323: ...t step 4 Previous GO Color Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous GE BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 6 Previous GO BW Displays the previous 2nd black offse...

Page 324: ... Previous BO Color Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Previous BE BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 6 Previous BO BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value ro...

Page 325: ...plays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Factory Setting RE BW Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 6 Factory Setting RO BW Displays the fa...

Page 326: ...ne adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 4 Factory Setting GO Color Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 5 Factory Setting GE BW Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment f...

Page 327: ... the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 3 Factory Setting BE Color Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step 4 Factory Setting BO Color Displays the factory s...

Page 328: ...ck level adjustment fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Gain Adjustment Display 4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red 1 Factory Setting RE Color 2 Factory Setting RO Color 3 Factory Setting RE BW 4 Factory Setting RO BW 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Display 4678 Displays the factory setting valu...

Page 329: ... Book Read 2 DF Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step Gray Balance Set G DFU 4686 Adjusts the gray balance of the green signal for each scanning mode 1 Book Read 2 DF Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step Gray Balance Set B DFU 4687 Adjusts the gray balance of the blue signal for each scanning mode 1 Book Read 2 DF Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step DF Density Adjustment 4688 Adjusts the white shading paramet...

Page 330: ...Adjustment 4803 Adjusts the home position of the exposure lamp 1 to 1 0 1 0 1 Returning to Scanner HP 4804 Moves the exposure lamp a short distance and immediately returns it to its home position Touch Execute Completed Exit Moving from Scanner HP 4806 Moves the exposure lamp a short distance away from the home position and stops Touch Execute Completed Exit Do SP4804 to return the exposure lamp t...

Page 331: ...nt Dot Erase Text Photo 2 Independent Dot Erase Generation 0 to 7 0 1 Dither Selection DFU 4905 Changes the parameters for dithering 0 to 255 0 1 step Filter Setting Other 4906 Outline level Adj 0 10 0 1 4907 SBU Test Pattern Change Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board 0 to 255 0 1 step 0 Default Scanning Image 1 Grid pattern 2 Gradation main scan 3 Gradation sub scan 4 to 25...

Page 332: ...Gray scale 5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction 6 RGB images done by Digital AE 7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction 8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction 9 RGB image done by Filtering correction 10 RGB images done by Full color ADS 11 RGB image done by Color correction Highlight Correction 4993 Selects the level of highlight correction 1 Sensitivity Selection Selects the ...

Page 333: ...les correction 0 to 9 4 1 step 0 weakest skew correction 9 strongest skew correction Text Photo Detection Level Adj 4994 Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF 0 to 2 1 1 step 0 Text priority 1 Normal 2 Photo priority ...

Page 334: ...d on the LCD 0 1 0 1 0 Displays the total counter only 1 Displays both total counter and printer counter 5047 Paper Display Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed 0 to 1 1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed Return Time Priority Type 5052 The recovery time of the Basic model is 5 sec so two settings are provided one for energy save priority and one for start time pr...

Page 335: ...he counter is doubled for A3 DLT Yes counts except from the bypass tray When Yes is selected A3 and DLT paper are counted twice that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively Density Level Setting 5106 Selects the image density level used in ADS mode 1 to 7 4 1 notch per step Example If you set SP5106 to 2 Pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles the display off and manual notch 2 is selected Adjust this...

Page 336: ...s control Note SDK refers to software on an SD card 0 to 3 1 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5114 Optional Counter I F MF Key Card Extension 001 Use this SP to change the setting to 1 only when the 5 MF Key Card is selected with SP5113 001 0 Not installed 1 Installed scanning accounting 5118 Disable Copying Temporarily denies access to the machine Japan Only 0...

Page 337: ...or at paper exit Japan Only 0 to 1 1 0 Feed count 1 No feed count F Size Original Setting 5126 Selects the F size original setting 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 81 2 x 13 Foolscap 1 81 4 x 13 Folio 2 8 x 13 F APS OFF Mode 5127 This SP can be used to switch APS Auto Paper Select off when a coin lock or pre paid key card device is connected to the machine 0 to 1 1 0 On 1 Off F Paper Size Selection 5129 Selects ...

Page 338: ...er to restore the archive files Bypass Length Setting 5150 Sets up the by pass tray for long paper 0 to 1 1 0 Off 1 On Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long With this SP selected on paper jams are not detected in the paper path App Switch Method 5162 Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software switch 0 to 1 1 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set Z Fold P...

Page 339: ...ernal accounting device 0 Automatic printing 1 No automatic printing CE Login 5169 If you will change the printer bit switches you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode 0 to 1 1 0 Off Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted 1 On Printer bit switches can be adjusted Bypass Size Error 5179 This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the...

Page 340: ...5212 Page Numbering 3 Duplex Printout Left Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 to 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is left is right 4 Duplex Printout High Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 to 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is down is up Set Time DFU 5302 Sets the time clock for the local tim...

Page 341: ...tober for months 1 to 9 the first digit of 0 cannot be input so the eight digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven digit setting 3rd Day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 4th The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit If 0 is selected for Sunday for example and the selected Sunday is the start of the 2nd week then input a 2 for this digit 5th 6th The time when the change occurs 2...

Page 342: ...D 221 SDK3 Certification Method SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstalled DFU 230 Certification Device User Code Count Clear 5404 Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine Press Execute to clear 5411 LDAP Certification 4 Easy Certification Determines whether easy LDAP certific...

Page 343: ...s the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off no wait time lockout not cancelled 1 On system waits cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered 4 Cancellation Time Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and password after a lockout has occurred This setting is use...

Page 344: ... Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected 1 to 10 5 1 sec 5416 Access Information 1 Access User Max Number Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 to 200 200 1 users 2 Access Password Max Number Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 ...

Page 345: ...have been detected 0 to 9 3 1 sec 4 Attack Max Number Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 50 to 200 200 1 attempt 5420 User Authentication These settings should be done with the System Administrator Note These functions are enabled only after the user access fe...

Page 346: ...1 Off 41 Printer Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications 0 to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 51 SDK1 61 SDK2 71 SDK3 0 or 1 0 1 0 ON 1 OFF Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application Authentication Error Code 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed 1 System Log Disp Determines wheth...

Page 347: ...ed Allows operation if another code is input and decrements the counter once for use of the entered code 5501 PM Alarm PM Alarm Interval 1 Sets the PM interval The value stored in this SP is used when the value of SP5501 2 is 1 0 to 255 0 1 k copies step Original Count Alarm DFU 2 Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not If this is 1 the PM alarm function is enabled 0...

Page 348: ...ts for each paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 DLT LG LT HLT 2 Staple Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On Switches the control call on off for the stapler installed in the finisher DFU 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On Switches the control call on off for the toner end DFU 0 Off 1 On If you select 1 the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end 12...

Page 349: ...h Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam 03 to 30 1 12 Jam Detection Continuous Count Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call 02 to 10 1 13 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call 03 to 30 1 SC Alarm Setting 5515 With NRS New Remote Service in use these SP codes can be set ...

Page 350: ... 0 or 1 1 0 Off 1 On 5792 MCS Debug Log DFU 5793 ECS Debug SW DFU Memory Clear 5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings Before executing any of these SP codes print an SMC Report 1 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below 2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings 3 SCS Initializes default system settings SCS System Control Service settings opera...

Page 351: ...inter CSS counter 9 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes 10 Web Service Deletes the Netfile NFA management files and thumbnails and initializes the Job login ID Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also the SmartNe...

Page 352: ...he LCS Log Count Service settings 20 Web Apli Initializes Web application settings 21 ECS Initializes ECS Engine Control Service Free Run 5802 Performs a free run for both scanner and the printer Touch ON to start the free run Touch OFF to stop 1 A4 LEF F1 Free run for A4 size paper long edge feed from the upper tray 2 A3 F2 Free run for A3 size paper from the lower tray 3 A4 SEF F2 Free run for A...

Page 353: ... Down Time Signal 9 Bank Motor Ready Signal 10 Bank Paper Height Sensor 11 Bank Set Sensor 12 Bank Cover Open 13 Fusing Unit Set 14 Interchange Sensor 15 Interchange Unit Set 16 1 Bin Unit Set 17 1 Bin Unit Paper Set 18 Tray 1 Paper Feed Sensor 19 Tray 1 Paper End Sensor 20 Tray 2 Paper Lift Sensor 21 Tray 1 Paper Lift Sensor 22 Tray 3 Paper End Sensor 23 Tray 4 Paper End Sensor 24 Tray 3 Paper Li...

Page 354: ...Sensor 31 Duplex Entrance Sensor 32 Duplex Exit Sensor 33 Registration Sensor 34 Front Safety SW 24V 35 Front Safety SW 5V 36 Paper Overflow Sensor 37 Fan Lock 38 Bottle Lock Motor 39 Destination Code 40 SIU BW Color 42 Bridge Exit Sensor 43 Bridge Relay Sensor 44 Bridge Center Cover Open 45 Bridge Right Cover Open 46 Bridge Unit Set Detection 47 Bridge Motor Lock 48 Shift Tray Unit Set ...

Page 355: ...per Exit Sensor 56 PCU Set 57 New PCU Sensor 58 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor 59 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor 60 Main Motor Ready Signal 61 Tray 2 Tray Set Sensor 62 Tray 1 Tray Set Sensor 63 Right Cover Open 200 Scanner HP Sensor 201 Platen Cover Sensor Output Check 5804 Turns on electrical components individually for test purposes 1 Main Motor Fwd Main motor forward 2 Main Motor Rev Main motor Reverse Do...

Page 356: ...Speed 9 1st Paper Feed CL Upper paper feed clutch 10 2nd Paper Feed CL Lower paper feed clutch 11 1st Paper Tray Up Upper paper lift motor Up 12 1st Paper Tray Down Upper paper lift motor Down 13 2nd Paper Tray Up Lower paper lift motor Up 14 2nd Paper Tray Down Lower paper lift motor Down 15 Paper Transport CL1 Upper relay clutch 16 Paper Transport CL2 Lower relay clutch 17 Fuser Drive Fusing dri...

Page 357: ... LCT 26 3rd LCT Tray Down Upper paper lift motor Down Optional paper tray unit or LCT 27 4th Tray Up Lower paper lift motor Up Optional paper tray unit 28 4th Tray Down Lower paper lift motor Down Optional paper tray unit 33 Exit Junction Gate SOL Upper Unit Exit junction gate Optional interchange unit 41 Interchange Motor CCW Interchange motor Reverse Optional duplex unit 42 Interchange Sensor SW...

Page 358: ... counter 60 Polygon Motor Polygonal mirror motor 61 Polygon Motor Polygonal mirror motor and laser diode 62 LD ON Laser diode Do not use 107 QL 108 PP Chrg 109 PP Development 110 PP Image Transfer 111 PP Separation Voltage PP means Power Pack PCBs 202 Scanner Lamp 5807 Option Connection Check 1 ARDF 2 Paper Tray Unit Checks the connectors to the optional peripheral devices Execution will return ...

Page 359: ...ne The allowed entries are A to Z and 0 to 9 The setting is done at the factory and should not be changed in the field 5812 Service Tel No Setting 1 Service Inputs the telephone number of the CE displayed when a service call condition occurs 2 Facsimile Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report UP mode Not Used 3 Supply Displayed on the initial SP screen 4 Operation ...

Page 360: ...te confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface 0 to 1 1 0 Yes SSL not used 1 No SSL used RCG Connect Timeout 8 Sets the length of time seconds for the time out when the RCG Remote Communication Gate connects during a call via the NRS network 1 to 90 1 sec RCG Write Timeout 9 Sets the length of time seconds for the time out when sent data is written to the RC...

Page 361: ...e registered Connect Type N M 23 This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method 0 Internet connection 1 Dial up connection Cert Expire Timing DFU 61 Proximity of the expiration of the certification Use Proxy 62 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center HTTP Proxy Host 063 This SP sets the address of the proxy server used ...

Page 362: ...t character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report HTTP Proxy Aut Pass 066 This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password The length of the name is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report CERT Up State Displays the status of the certification upd...

Page 363: ...tification has been stored and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event 16 The storing of the certification has failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event 17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed but an certification error has been receiv...

Page 364: ... updated even without the HDD installed Firm Up User Check 85 This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL Firmware Size 86 Allows the service t...

Page 365: ...rtification Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists CERT Issuer 92 Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification CN the following 30 bytes Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists CERT Valid Start 93 Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled CERT Valid End 94 Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is...

Page 366: ...U Manual Polling 200 No information is available at this time Regist Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device 0 Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set 1 The Cumin device is being set Only Box registration is completed In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request 2 The Cumin device is set In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a pol...

Page 367: ... 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 204 9 Inquiry executing Confirm Place 205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW U...

Page 368: ...SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed Cause Code Meaning 11001 Chat parameter error 11002 Chat execution error Illegal Modem Parameter 11003 Unexpected error 12002 Inquiry registration attempted without acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration Operation Error Incorrect Setting 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for ...

Page 369: ...l is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format 2398 Incorrect request number format Instl Clear 209 Releases the machine from its embedded RCG setup CommLog Print 250 Prints the communication log 5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only 1 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code After you change this setting you must turn the machine off and on 2 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote Commun...

Page 370: ...8 bit entry is 192 168 000 001 this is read 0C0A80001h 2 IPv4 Subnet Mask Ethernet IEEE 802 11 This SP allows you to confirm and reset the IPv4 subnet mask for Ethernet and a wireless LAN 802 11 aaa bbb ccc ddd For example if the 8 bit entry is 255 255 255 00 this is read FFFFFF00h 3 IPv4 Default Gateway Ethernet IEEE 802 11 This SP allows you to confirm and reset the IPv4 default gateway used by ...

Page 371: ...the setting for the IPv4 subnet mask is FFFFFF00H this is displayed as 255 255 255 000 23 Active IPv4 Gateway Address This SP allows you to confirm the IPv4 default gateway setting that was used when the machine started up with DHCP For example if the setting for the IPv4 gateway is 0C0A80001h this is displayed as 192 168 000 001 50 1284 Compatibility Centro Enables and disables bi directional com...

Page 372: ...Japan Only 1 FTP Not Used 5 DIPRINT 2 IPP 6 Reserved Not Used 3 SMB 7 Reserved Not Used 90 TELNET 0 OFF 1 ON Disables or enables Telnet operation If this SP is disabled the Telnet port is closed 0 to 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 91 Web Operation 0 OFF 1 ON Disables or enables the Web operation 0 to 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 145 ActIPv6LinkLocal This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the Ethernet or w...

Page 373: ...ions can be abbreviated See Note IPV6 Addresses below this table 158 IPv6 Gateway This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each These notations can be abbreviated See Note IPV6 Addresses below this table Note IPV6 Addresses Ethernet and the Wireless LAN 802 11 reference the ...

Page 374: ...ion can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros but this can be done only at one point in the address The example in 2 and 3 above then becomes fe80 207 40ff 0 340e only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as or fe80 0 0 0 207 40ff 340e only the last null set before 340e is abbreviated as 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Enables disables the stateless automatic setting...

Page 375: ... linked to the Websys linked page The link name is limited to 127 characters 241 Web Link 1 Visible Determines whether the link for URL1 is displayed on the Websys top page 0 to 1 1 1 1 Display 0 No display 242 Web Link 2 Name Determines whether a name entered for URL2 is displayed on the Websys link page The name length is limited to 31 characters 243 Web Link 2 URL Sets the URL referenced for UR...

Page 376: ...ing User Info 7 Mail RX Data 8 Mail TX Data 9 HDD Formatting Data for Design 10 HDD Formatting Log 11 HDD Formatting Ridoc I F for Ridoc Desk Top Binder 5836 Capture Setting Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 1 With this function disabled the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized displayed or selected 0 to 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable Panel Setting 2 Determines whether each capture rela...

Page 377: ... 75 Reduction for Printer B W 0 to 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 76 Reduction for Printer B W HQ 1 to 5 1 1 1 2 3 1 4 4 1 6 5 1 8 81 Format for Copy Color 0 to 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR DFU 82 Format for Copy B W Text 0 to 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 83 Format Copy B W Other 0 to 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 84 Format for Printer Color 0 ...

Page 378: ...es for different countries 1 to 14 1 Channel MIN 7 Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN This bandwidth setting varies for different countries 1 to 14 1 Transmission Speed 0 x 00 to 0 x FF 0 x FF to Auto 8 0 x FF to Auto Default 0 x 11 55M Fix 0 x 10 48M Fix 0 x 0F 36M Fix 0 x 0E 18M Fix 0 x 0D 12M Fix 0 x 0B 9M Fix 0 x 0A 6M Fix 0 x 07 11M Fix 0 x 05 5 5M Fix 0...

Page 379: ... the CTS self function is turned on or off 0 to 1 1 1 0 Off 1 On This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 44 11g Slot Time Selects the slot time for IEEE802 11 0 to 1 0 1 0 20 μm 1 9 μm This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 45 WPA Debug Lvl Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP is disp...

Page 380: ...Net File process 5844 USB Transfer Rate 1 Sets the speed for USB data transmission Full Speed Auto Change Vendor ID 2 Sets the vendor ID Initial Setting 0x05A Ricoh Company 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 1 DFU Product ID 3 Sets the product ID 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 1 DFU Device Release No 4 Sets the device release number of the BCD binary coded decimal display 0000 to 9999 1 DFU Enter as a decimal number NCS converts...

Page 381: ...ting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device 0 to 999 1 IP Address Secondary 8 Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery server for Scan Router This SP lets you set only the IP address and does not refer to the DNS setting Delivery Server Model 9 ...

Page 382: ...it0 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit6 is set to 0 Delivery Svr Capability Ext 11 These settings are for future use They will let you increase the number of registered devices in addition to those registered for SP5845 010 There are eight bits Bit 0 to Bit 7 All are unused at this time 13 Server Scheme Primary 14 Server Port Number Primary 15 Server URL Path Primary 16 Server Scheme ...

Page 383: ...ies 3 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle 2000 to 50000 1 If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed Delivery Server Retry Timer 6 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book 0 to 255 1 s 0 No retries Delivery Serv...

Page 384: ...this SP After the address book data is copied to HDD all the address book data is deleted from the source SD card If the operation fails the data is not erased from the SD card Fill Addr Acl Info 41 This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed the system autom...

Page 385: ... in the delivery address book that is controlled by UCS Initialize LDAP Addr Book 49 Push Execute to delete all items this does not include user codes in the LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS Initialize All Addr Book 50 Clears everything including users codes in the directory information managed by UCS However the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not deleted Backup...

Page 386: ... local address book Bit Meaning 0 Checks both upper lower case characters 1 2 3 Japan Only 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 60 7 Not Used Complexity Option 1 62 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 1 Note This SP does not normally require adjustm...

Page 387: ...t normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book Complexity Option 4 65 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the password 0 to 32 1 Note This SP does not norm...

Page 388: ... Other 0 to 6 1 5847 5 Rate for Printer B W 0 to 6 1 5847 6 Rate for Printer B W HQ 0 to 6 1 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 6x 5 1 8x 6 2 3x1 1 6 2 3x applies to 003 005 006 only Network Quality Default for JPEG 5847 21 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages This function is available only with the MLB Media Link Board option installed 5 to 95 1 Web Service 5848...

Page 389: ...wer 4 Bits 4 Acc Ctrl User Directory Lower 4 Bits 5 Acc Ctrl Delivery Input Lower 4 Bits 7 Acc Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4 Bits 9 Acc Ctrl Job Control Lower 4 Bits 11 Acc Ctrl Device Management Lower 4 Bits 21 Acc Ctrl Delivery Lower 4 Bits 22 Acc Ctrl User Administration Lower 4 Bits 41 Acc Ctrl Security Setting Lower 4 Bits only Switches access control on and off 0000 OFF 0001 ON 100 Repository Do...

Page 390: ... Srv 214 No information is available at this time Setting Start Time 215 No information is available at this time Setting Interval Time 216 No information is available at this time Setting Timing 217 No information is available at this time Installation Date 5849 Displays or prints the installation date of the machine 1 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst Da...

Page 391: ...h Execute to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk Then these stamps can be used by the system If this is not done the user will not have access to the fixed stamps Confidential Secret etc You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP Remote ROM Update 5856 When set to...

Page 392: ...itten to the SD Card Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB 9 Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD Card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key 10 Takes the log of the specif...

Page 393: ...14 Copies the last 4MB of the log written directly to the card from shared memory onto an SD card Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Any Key 15 This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to a log specified by key number Make HDD Debug 16 This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD Make SD Debug 17 This SP creates a 4 MB file to ...

Page 394: ...ese SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board 9999999 to 9999999 1 5860 SMTP POP3 IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive Timeout 20 1 to 168 72 1 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time M...

Page 395: ...enabled for the SMTP server This can occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards In such cases you can use this SP to set the SMTP certification method directly However this SP can be used only encryption has been enabled Bit 0 LOGIN Bit 1 PLAIN Bit 2 CRAM_MD5 Bit 3 DIGEST_MD5 Bit 4 to Bit 7 Not Used 26 S MIMI MIME Header Setting 5866 E Mail Report Not Used 1 Report Validity Enables or di...

Page 396: ...es the move from one SD card to another 2 Undo Exec This is an undo function It cancels the previous execution 5875 SC Auto Reboot This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs Note The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes 1 Reboot Setting 0 to 1 0 1 0 The machine reboots automatically after the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code If th...

Page 397: ... web image monitor 0 OFF 1 ON Bit 0 Forbid all document server access 1 Forbid user mode access 2 Forbid print function 3 Forbid Fax 4 Forbid scan sending 5 Forbid download 6 Forbid delete 7 Forbid guest user 50 DocSvr Format Selects the display type for the document box list 0 to 2 0 1 0 Thumbnail 1 Icon 2 Details 51 DocSvr Trans Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box li...

Page 398: ...tion for logs 1 No authentication Protected logs an administrator can see the logs Plug Play Maker Model Name 5907 Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug Play This information is stored in the NVRAM If the NVRAM is defective these names should be registered again After selecting press the Original Type key and key at the same time When the setting is completed the beeper s...

Page 399: ... Permission Time Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed 3 to 30 1 s Mechanical Counter Detection 5915 Checks whether the mechanical counter inside the inner cover is connected or not Display 0 Not detected 1 Detected 2 Unknown Exha...

Page 400: ...image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD After changing this setting you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting 0 to 1 1 0 ON 1 OFF Cherry Server 5974 Selects which version of the Scan Router application program Light or Full Professional is installed 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Light version supplied with this machine 1 Full version optional Device Setting 5985 ...

Page 401: ...the paper size then press Start Select A4 LT Sideways or larger to ensure that all the information prints Press SP Window to return to the SP mode select the desired print and press Execute 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 User Program 4 Logging Data 5 Diagnostic Report 6 Non Default Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults 7 NIB Summary 8 Capture Log 21 Copier User Program 22 Scanne...

Page 402: ...hows intended destination of the engine board 0 Japan 1 North America 2 Europe 3 Mainland China 4 Taiwan 2 SBCU ID Displays the CPM information for the engine board For example 25 25 cpm 30 30 cpm and so on 3 IPU ID Displays the IPU ID presently fixed at 30 ...

Page 403: ...t 6 Buckle Duplex Rear Adjust the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step 7 Rear Edge Erase Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step ADF Input Check 6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF Only Bit 0 is used for ADF input check 1 Original B5 Sensor 2 Original A4...

Page 404: ...losed 1 ADF open ADF Output Check 6008 Switches on each electrical component motors solenoids etc of the ARDF for testing 3 Feed Motor Fwd 4 Feed Motor Rev 5 Transport Motor Fwd 6 Transport Motor Rev 9 Feed Clutch 10 Feed Solenoid 11 Junction Gate Solenoid 12 Stamp Solenoid ADF Free Run 6009 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode Press ON to start press OFF to stop Note This is a general free ru...

Page 405: ...not recognize all sizes 7 0000 0000 0 Different bits are used for detection depending on the location as shown below Bit Size Location 7 A4 L LT L 6 11 x 15 DLT L Japan only 5 DLT L 11 x 15 4 LT S US Exec S 3 LT L 8 x 10 L 2 LG L F4 L NA only 1 A4 L 16K L 0 8K L DLT L EU AA only Sheet Through Magnification 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for the ARDF 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 step ...

Page 406: ...0 1 7 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor Activated Deactivated 6 Not Used 5 Jogger Fence HP Sensor Activated Deactivated 4 Stapler HP Sensor Activated Deactivated 3 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated 2 Not Used 1 Lower Tray Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated Group 1 0 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated Reading Number Bit Description 0 1 7 Not Used 6 Not Used 5 Stapler Ready Signal Act...

Page 407: ... 0 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated Reading Number Bit Description 0 1 7 Not Used 6 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated 5 Not used 4 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated 3 Not Used 2 Not Used 1 Shift HP Sensor Activated Deactivated Group 3 0 Exit Guide HP Sensor Activated Deactivated Reading Number Bit Description 0 1 7 Not Used 6 Not Used Group 4 5 Not Used ...

Page 408: ...eck 6118 Switches on each electrical component of the finisher for testing Press 1 to switch on or 0 to switch off 1 Upper Transport Main Motor 2 Shift Tray Lift Tray Motor 3 Staple Hammer Motor 4 Shift Jogger Motor 5 Lower Transport Motor 6 Shift Tray Exit Motor 7 Tray Junction Gate Sol 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor 10 Stapler Junction Gate Motor 11 Positioning Roller Sol 12 Stack Feed Out Motor...

Page 409: ... scan direction 1 Domestic 2Hole 2 North America 3Hole 3 Europe 4Hole 4 North Europe 4Hole 5 North Europe 2Hole 7 5 to 7 5 0 0 5 mm step Punch Position Main Scan 6129 Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction 1 Domestic 2Hole 2 North America 3Hole 3 Europe 4Hole 4 North Europe 4Hole 5 North Europe 2Hole 2 0 to 2 0 0 0 4 mm step Skew Correction Buckle Adj 6130 Adjusts the paper buckl...

Page 410: ...EF 11 12 x 18 12 Other 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 25 mm step Skew Correction Control 6131 Selects the skew correction control for each paper size These are only activated for B793 1 A3T SEF 2 B4T SEF 3 A4T SEF 4 A4Y LEF 5 B5T SEF 6 B5Y LEF 7 DLT T SEF 8 LG T SEF 0 to 2 1 1 step 0 No No skew correction 1 Roller Stop Skew Correction 2 Roller Reverse Skew Correction ...

Page 411: ...done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed 1 A3T SEF 2 B4T SEF 3 A4T SEF 4 A4Y LEF 5 B5T SEF 6 B5Y LEF 7 DLT T SEF 8 LG T SEF 9 LT T SEF 10 LT Y LEF 11 12 x 18 12 Other 1 5 to 1 5 0 1 step Value Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack Value Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack Staple Position Adjustment 6133 Adjusts the stap...

Page 412: ...klet Finisher B793 1 A3 SEF 2 B4 SEF 3 A4 SEF 4 B5 SEF 5 DLT T SEF 6 LG T SEF 7 LT T SEF 8 12 x 18 9 Other 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 2 mm step Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 6135 Folder Position Adjustment This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B793 1 A3 SEF 2 B4 SEF 3 A4 SEF 4 B5 SEF 5 D...

Page 413: ...n Free Run 6137 These SPs are used only for B793 finisher 1 Free Run 1 Free run for paper edge stapling 2 Free Run 2 Free run for booklet stapling 3 Free Run 3 Shipping free run Simulates standby conditions during shipping 4 Free Run 4 DFU FIN TIG Input Check 1000 Sheet Finisher B793 Note The names in parentheses are the names used in the service manuals 6138 Component 0 1 1 Interference Escape Se...

Page 414: ... Exit Sensor Paper No Paper 9 Stuck Relay2 Roller HP Sensor Clamp Roller HP Sensor At HP Not HP 10 Folder Tray Full Sensor 1 Bottom Tray HP 1 Sensor Full Not full 11 Folder Tray Full Sensor 2 Bottom Tray HP 2 Sensor Not full Full 12 Folder Plate HP Sensor Fold Plate HP Sensor Not HP At HP 13 Saddle Stitch Arrival Sensor Fold Unit Entrance Sensor No Paper Paper 14 Folder Cam HP Sensor Fold Plate Ca...

Page 415: ...oof Tray Full Sensor Not full Full 25 Upper Cover Sensor Open Close 26 Door SW Front Door Switch Close Open 27 Clincher Timing Sensor Encoder 28 Clincher HP Sensor At HP Not HP 29 Driver Timing Sensor Encoder 30 Staple Near End Staples Remain Staples N E 31 Self Priming Staples No Staples 32 Driver HP Sensor At HP Not HP 33 Punch Registration Detection HP Sensor Not HP At HP 34 Punch Moving HP Sen...

Page 416: ...Shift Exit Sensor Lower Tray Exit Sensor No Paper Paper 3 Staple Entrance Sensor Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor Paper No Paper 4 Staple Moving HP Sensor Stapler HP Sensor Not HP At HP 5 Jogger HP Sensor Jogger Fence HP Sensor Not HP At HP 6 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor At HP Not HP 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No Paper Paper 8 Staple Rotation Sensor Staple Rotation HP Sensor Not HP At HP 9 Staple Sen...

Page 417: ...below Display is what you see on the screen and Component is the name used in the service manuals Display Component 1 Shift Motor Shift Tray Motor 2 Entrance Motor 3 Staple Relay Motor Stapler Unit Motor 4 Knock Solenoid 5 Junction Gate SOL 1 Proof Tray Gate Solenoid 6 Junction Gate SOL 2 Staple Tray Gate Solenoid 7 Folder Roller Rotation Motor Fold Roller Motor 8 Staple Motor Staple Fold Motor 10...

Page 418: ...h Movement Motor FIN KIN Output Check 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 6144 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher Note In the table below Display is what you see on the screen and Component is the name used in the service manuals Display Component 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor 3 Exit Motor 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL...

Page 419: ...re the names used in the service manuals 0 means LOW 1 means HIGH Component 0 1 1 Entrance Sensor Paper No Paper 2 Hitroll HP Sensor Positioning Roller HP Sensor Not HP At HP 3 Front Jogger HP Sensor Front Fence HP Sensor Not HP At HP 4 Rear Jogger HP Sensor Rear Fence HP Sensor Not HP At HP 5 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper No Paper 6 Staple Moving HP Sensor Stapler HP Sensor Not HP At HP 7 Stack ...

Page 420: ... booklet finisher Note In the table below Display is what you see on the screen and Component is the name used in the service manuals Display Component 1 Carry Motor Transport Motor 2 Hitroll Motor Positioning Roller Arm Motor 3 Front Jogger Motor Front Fence Motor 4 Rear Jogger Motor Rear Fence Motor 5 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Movement Motor 6 Stack Feed Out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor 7 Tray Mo...

Page 421: ... to revolve to print 1 copy increases this data combined with the number of copies can be used to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development Display 0000000 to 9999999 min Total SC Counter 7401 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred 7403 SC History 1 Latest 2 Latest 1 3 Latest 2 4 Latest 3 5 Latest 4 6 Latest 5 7 Latest 6 8 Latest 7 9 Latest 8 10 Lat...

Page 422: ...r occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time Note Lag Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time Late Jam occurs because paper fails to arrive at the prescribed time KIN 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 TIG 1000 Sheet Finisher B793 ELB 500 Sheet Finisher D372 1 At Power On 3 Tray 1 No Feed 4 Tray 2 No Feed 5 Tray 3 No Feed 6 Tray 4 No Fe...

Page 423: ...te 25 Junction Gate Sn Late 26 Jct Inv Sn Late 27 Duplex Ent Sn Late 51 Trans 1 Sn Lag 52 Trans 2 Sn Lag 53 Trans 3 Sn Lag 57 Registration Sn Lag 58 LCT Trans Sn Lag 60 Main Ex Sn Lag 61 Bridge Ex Sn Lag 62 Bridge Trans Sn Lag 65 Jct Gate Sn Lag 66 Jct Inv Sn Lag 67 Duplex Ent Sn Lag 100 FIN Entrance KIN 101 FIN Shift Tray Exit KIN 102 FIN Staple KIN 103 FIN Exit KIN ...

Page 424: ...e TIG 131 FIN Proof Tray Exit TIG 132 FIN Shift Tray TIG 133 FIN Staple Exit TIG 134 FIN Exit TIG 135 FIN Fold TIG 136 FIN Fold TIG 137 FIN Guide Gate Motor TIG 138 FIN Staple Shift Motor TIG 139 FIN Paper Punch Motor TIG 140 FIN Tray Lift Motor TIG 141 FIN Jogger Motor TIG 142 FIN Shift Motor TIG 143 FIN Staple Motor TIG 144 FIN Staple Motor TIG 145 FIN Exit Motor TIG 146 FIN Stack Release Motor ...

Page 425: ... Exit Motor ELB 167 FIN Staple Shift Motor ELB 168 FIN Staple Motor ELB 169 FIN Tray Lift Motor ELB 170 FIN Stack Height SOL ELB Original Jam Location 7505 Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors Note Lag Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time Late Jam occurs because paper f...

Page 426: ... Jam Count by Paper Size 5 A4 LEF 6 A5 LEF 14 B5 LEF 38 LT LEF 44 HLT LEF 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF 160 DLT SEF 164 LG SEF 166 LT SEF 172 HLT SEF 255 Others Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size 7507 Plotter Jam History 7507 1 Last Displays the copy jam history the most recent 10 jams ...

Page 427: ...L is the total jam error count SP7502 DATE is the date the jams occurred Size Code Size Code Size Code A4 S 05 A3 L 84 DLT L A0 A5 S 06 A4 L 85 LG L A4 B5 S 0E A5 L 86 LT L A6 LT S 26 B4 L 8D HLT L AC HLT S 2C B5 L 8E Others FF 7508 Original Jam History 1 Last 2 Last 1 3 Last 2 4 Last 3 5 Last 4 6 Last 5 7 Last 6 Displays the original jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display CODE 007 SIZ...

Page 428: ...in the system including the mainframe the ARDF and peripheral devices PM Counter Display 7803 Displays the PM counter since the last PM 1 Paper 2 Sheets 60K Part 3 Sheets 120K Part 4 Distance m 60 K 5 Distance m 120 6 Distance 60K 7 Distance 120K PM Counter Resets 7804 Resets the PM counter To reset press Execute on the touch panel 1 Paper 2 Sheets 60K 3 Sheets 120K 7807 SC Jam Counter Reset ...

Page 429: ... a staple count failed at power on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only 7827 Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826 Japan Only Self Diagnose Result Display 7832 Execute to open the Self Diagnostics Result Display to view details about errors Use the keys in the display on the touch panel to scroll through all the information ...

Page 430: ...is switched on 2 Dust Check Counter Clear Clears the count Memory All Clear SP5801 resets this counter to zero Zero Cross 7856 Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency for main power ac Assert Info DFU 7901 These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code generated by the machine 1 File Name Module name 2 Number of Lines Number of the lines where error...

Page 431: ...re the most recent PM count for 60K and 120K service parts 60K and 120 refer to service life 1 Paper 2 Sheets 60K Part 3 Sheets 120K Part 4 Distance m 60 K 5 Distance m 120 K 6 Distance 60K 7 Distance 120K Before 3 PM Count 7908 Displays the PM count two counts the most recent PM count for 60K and 120K service parts 60K and 120 refer to service life 1 Paper 2 Sheets 60K Part 3 Sheets 120K Part 4 D...

Page 432: ... Counter Display 7909 Displays the value of the PCU counter number of copies since the last PCU change Engine Debug Log Switch This SP switches the contents of the debug log 0 RHM log all 4 Scanner log 2 1 Plotter log 5 Scanner log 3 2 Print log 6 Scanner log 4 7999 3 Scanner log 1 7 255 RHM log all ...

Page 433: ... application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Service Table make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean Prefixes What It Means T Total Grand Total Grand...

Page 434: ...s to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the nam...

Page 435: ...n FC Full Color FIN Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on...

Page 436: ...ed around combined and converted to different formats PC Personal Computer PGS Pages A page is the total scanned surface of the original Duplex pages count as two pages and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3 DLT counter SP is switched ON PJob Print Jobs Ppr Paper PrtJam Printer plotter Jam PrtPGS Print Pages R Red Toner Remaining Applies to the wide format model A2 only This machine is under ...

Page 437: ... total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server plus the number of times a file already on the document server is used These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used not the number of pages processed When an application is opened for image input or output this counts as one job Interrupted jobs paper jams etc are counted even though they do ...

Page 438: ...ored on the document server the C and L counters both increment When a print job is stored on the document server only the L counter increments When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server only the L counter increments When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server only the L counter increments When an image recei...

Page 439: ...ithin the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application the C counter increments When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server the C and P counters both increment When a job already on the document server is...

Page 440: ...cation Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments 8041 T TX Jobs LS 8042 C TX Jobs LS 8043 F TX Jobs LS 8044 P TX Jobs LS 8045 S TX Jobs LS 8046 L TX Jobs LS 8047 O TX Jobs LS These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I F...

Page 441: ... Web Image Monitor for example then the O counter increments T FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8061 These SPs total the finishing methods The finishing method is specified by the application C FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application F FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax j...

Page 442: ...n a stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document server the L counter increments See SP8066 1 806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode 806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode 806x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode If the machine is in staple mode the Staple counter also increments 806x 5 Z Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than ...

Page 443: ...can jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job L Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel by the number of pages in the job O Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs Web Image Monitor Palm 2 etc by size based on the nu...

Page 444: ... of the copy job SP 8072 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen the page is counted T FAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8111 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent by fax either directly or using a file stored on the document server on a telephone line F FAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8113 These SPs count the total number of jobs color...

Page 445: ...t T S to Email Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8131 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e mail regardless of whether the document server was used or not S S to Email Jobs 8135 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e mail without storing the original on the document server 813x 1 B W Monochrome 813x 2 Color Color 813x 3 ACS Automatic Color Selection The...

Page 446: ...4x 1 B W Monochrome 814x 2 Color Color 814x 3 ACS Automatic Color Selection The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server cannot be confirmed If even one color image is mixed with black and white images then the job is counted as a Color job If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be deli...

Page 447: ... sending the transmission counts as one job 8161 T PCFAX TX Jobs 8163 F PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs A job is counted from when it is registered for sending not when it is sent 0 to 9999999 0 1 This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier 8191 T Total Scan PGS 819...

Page 448: ...nt the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission are not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display S LSize Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8205 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax...

Page 449: ...F that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up 8221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scannin...

Page 450: ...mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode The user cannot select mixed sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is enabled In the SAD...

Page 451: ...screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 2 Text Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 5 Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 11 Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode 8251 T Scan PGS I...

Page 452: ...ters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions 0 to 9999999 0 1 8291 T Scan PGS Stamp 8293 F Scan PGS Stamp 8295 S Scan PGS Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the...

Page 453: ... 1 8305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 445 L Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8306 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Cop...

Page 454: ... 831x 2 600dpito1199dpi 831x 3 400dpito599dpi 831x 4 200dpito399dpi 831x 5 to199dpi Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted The Fax application does not allow finely adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application 8381 T Total PrtPGS 8382 C Total PrtPGS 8383 F Total PrtPGS 8384 P Total PrtPGS 8385 S Total PrtPGS 8386 L Total PrtPGS These SPs count the nu...

Page 455: ... service summaries engine maintenance reports etc Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam LSize PrtPGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3 DLT and larger Note In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report These counters appear in the SMC report as well as on the machine display 84...

Page 456: ...tings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application F PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 8423 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application P PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 8424 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer applica...

Page 457: ...4 pages on 1 side 4 Up 842x 8 6 6 pages on 1 side 6 Up 842x 9 8 8 pages on 1 side 8 Up 842x 10 9 9 pages on 1 side 9 Up 842x 11 16 16 pages on 1 side 16 Up 842x 12 Booklet 842x 13 Magazine These counts SP8421 to SP8427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n U...

Page 458: ...999 0 1 8432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application P PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 8434 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application L PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 8436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the ...

Page 459: ...se SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8444 These SPs count by print...

Page 460: ...es printed by Other applications 844x 1 A3 844x 2 A4 844x 3 A5 844x 4 B4 844x 5 B5 844x 6 DLT 844x 7 LG 844x 8 LT 844x 9 HLT 844x 10 Full Bleed 844x 254 Other Standard 844x 255 Other Custom These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF PrtPGS Ppr Tray 0 to 9999999 0 1 8451 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 2 Tray 1 Copier 3 Tray 2 Co...

Page 461: ...all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type ...

Page 462: ... mode window at the operation panel 846x 1 Normal 846x 2 Recycled 846x 3 Special 846x 4 Thick 846x 5 Normal Back 846x 6 Thick Back 846x 7 OHP 846x 8 Other PrtPGS Mag 0 to 9999999 0 1 8471 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed 1 to49 2 50 to99 3 100 4 101 to200 5 201 to Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages not only on the operation panel but performed rem...

Page 463: ...blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 8481 T PrtPGS TonSave P PrtPGS TonSave 8484 These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on Note These SPs return the same results because this SP is limited to the Print application 0 to 9999999 0 1 T PrtPGS Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 8511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total ...

Page 464: ...GS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 8521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 8522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application F PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 8523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application P PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 ...

Page 465: ...arge for stapling the unstapled pages are still counted The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray so jam recoveries are counted 852x 1 Sort 852x 2 Stack 852x 3 Staple 852x 4 Booklet 852x 5 Z Fold 852x 6 Punch 852x 7 Other 8531 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine 0 to 9999999 0 1 T Counter 0 to 9999999 0 1 8581 These SPs count the total outp...

Page 466: ...F FAX TX PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8633 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than on...

Page 467: ...e destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination T S to Email PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for both the Scan and document server applications S S to ...

Page 468: ...Ps count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications S Deliv PGS Svr 0 to 9999999 0 1 8665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application 1 B W 2 Color Note The B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server If the job is canceled ...

Page 469: ...up by 10 not 20 8691 T TX PGS LS 8692 C TX PGS LS 8693 F TX PGS LS 8694 P TX PGS LS 8695 S TX PGS LS 8696 L TX PGS LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server The counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Page...

Page 470: ... 8701 3 PSTN 3 8701 4 ISDN G3 G4 8701 5 Network T Scan PGS Comp 0 to 9999999 1 8711 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the document server counted by the formats listed below 8711 1 JPEG JPEG2000 8711 2 TIFF Multi Single 8711 3 PDF 8711 4 Other S Scan PGS Comp 0 to 9999999 1 8 715 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application counted by the...

Page 471: ...lack and other color toners Pixel Coverage Ratio 8781 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used The count is done based on the equivalent of 1 000 pages per bottle 8791 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents 0 to 100 0 1 Toner Remain 0 to 100 0 1 8801 This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color This S...

Page 472: ...s 1 K Black toner 2 M Magenta toner 3 C Cyan toner 4 Y Yellow toner Do not display for this machine Cover Cnt 11 20 0 to 9999999 8861 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 1 K Black toner 2 M Magenta toner 3 C Cyan toner 4 Y Yellow toner Do not display for this machine Cover Cnt 21 30 0 to 9999999 8871 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black o...

Page 473: ... Toner Bottle DFU 8901 Page Toner_Prev1 DFU 8911 Page Toner_Prev2 DFU Cvr Cnt Total 8921 1 Coverage BK 11 Cover Page BK Machine Status 0 to 9999999 0 1 8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards 1 Operation Time Engine operation ...

Page 474: ...rming background printing Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning 9 Supply PM Wait End Total down time due to toner end AddBook Register 8951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages dat...

Page 475: ...am job settings feature 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program job settings feature 10 Scanner Program Scanner application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 Admin Counter List 0 to 9999999 0 1 8999 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 1 Total 3 Copy BW 7 Printer BW 10 Fax Print BW 12 A3 DLT 13 Duplex 15 ...

Page 476: ...SP8xxx Data Log 2 D017 D018 D019 D020 5 212 SM 102 Transmission Total BW 103 FAX Transmission 104 Scanner Transmission Color 105 Scanner Transmission BW ...

Page 477: ...ed only for Operation Panel downloading Never switch off the power while downloading Switching off the power while the new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller 8 After confirming that downloading is completed turn off the main power and remove the SD card 9 If more software needs to be downloaded repeat steps 1 to 7 10 Turn the main power on and confirm that t...

Page 478: ... TOOLS COUNTER DISPLAY To enter the UP mode press User Tools Counter 5 11 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS In the User Tools Counter display press System Settings Click a tab to display the settings If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner press it to display more options Make the settings press Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press Exit to return to the copy window 5 11 3 CO...

Page 479: ...inter Settings Facsimile or Scanner Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more settings 5 11 5 INQUIRY In the User Tools Counter display press Inquiry The following SP mode settings will be displayed Consumables Telephone Number Service Telephone Number Serial Number of Machine Sales Representative Telephone No 5 11 6 COUNTER In the User Tools Counter display pr...

Page 480: ...wnload Error LED 1 Off Blinking Off LED 2 Blinking Blinking Lit or Off SBCU Number Normal Controller Software Download Error LED 1 Lit Lit Off or Blinking LED 2 Blinking Lit Lit except downloading or Off 5 12 2 DIP SWITCHES Controller SW1 Number OFF ON 1 Boot from SD card Default Boot from Flash ROM 2 to 7 Default OFF DFU 8 Default DFU ...

Page 481: ...LED and DIP Switches SM 5 217 D017 D018 D019 D020 Service Tables SBCU SW102 Bit Destination 1 2 3 4 Japan OFF OFF OFF OFF NA ON OFF OFF OFF EU ASIA OFF ON OFF OFF SW103 DFU Do not change these settings ...

Page 482: ...h the machine follow the procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD Then ask the user to reproduce the problem 5 13 1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function is switched on and a target is selected 1 Enter the SP mode Press J Clear Modes then use the 10 key pad to input ...

Page 483: ...hat you want to record in the debug log SP5858 Debug Save When provides the following items for selection 1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams More than one event c...

Page 484: ...les for reading and recording debug information Touch 5859 7 Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record 8 Enter the appropriate 4 digit number then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers The initials in parenth...

Page 485: ...inter Design Language GSP PM GW Print Service Print Module PTS Print Server IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource Management NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box Document Server The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD the target selected with SP5 857 002 for the events that you se...

Page 486: ...he file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email or just send the SD card by mail 5 13 3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data Such ...

Page 487: ...ched off and on before the log can be created completely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD With the file already created on the HDD for the log file the data only needs to be recorded a new log file does not require creation To create a new log file execute SP5857 011 to...

Page 488: ......

Page 489: ...DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...

Page 490: ......

Page 491: ...Overview SM 6 1 D017 D018 D019 D020 Detailed Descriptions 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ...

Page 492: ...oard 9 Exit roller 10 Fusing hot roller 11 Fusing pressure roller 12 Cleaning unit 13 OPC drum 14 Transfer roller 15 Development roller 16 ID sensor 17 Registration roller 18 Friction pad 19 Paper feed roller 20 Bottom plate 21 Tray heater 22 Polygon mirror motor 23 Laser unit 24 Toner supply bottle holder 25 Drum charge roller 26 Scanner home position sensor ...

Page 493: ... Detailed Descriptions 6 1 2 PAPER PATH 1 Optional ADF 2 Optional 1 bin Tray 3 Optional Interchange Unit 4 Optional Duplex Unit 5 Optional By pass Feed Tray 6 Optional Paper Tray Unit 7 Optional 1000 sheet Finisher 8 Optional Bridge Unit ...

Page 494: ...ply Motor Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the development unit M Exhaust Fan Motor Removes heat from around the fusing unit M Polygonal Motor Rotates the polygonal mirror M Main Motor Drives the main unit components M Scanner Motor Mono Monochrome scanner unit M Scanner Motor Color Color scanner unit Magnetic Clutches MC Lower Paper Feed Clutch Starts paper feed from the 2nd paper tray...

Page 495: ...s when the paper in the 1st paper tray is at the feed height S 2nd Paper Lift Sensor Detects when the paper in the 2nd paper tray is at the feed height S TD Sensor Toner Density Sensor Detects the amount of toner inside the development unit S New PCU Detect Sensor Detects when a new PCU is installed S 1st Paper End Sensor Informs the CPU when the 1st paper tray runs out of paper S Upper Relay Sens...

Page 496: ...cts paper size in the upper tray according to the position of the side fence used in combination with the upper tray bottom fence sensors S 1st Tray Detect Sensor Detects the presence of the upper tray S 2nd Bottom Fence Sensor 1 1 of 3 paper size sensors inside the machine that detects paper size in the lower tray according to the position of the bottom fence S 2nd Bottom Fence Sensor 2 1 of 3 pa...

Page 497: ...nsor 3 Original Length Mono 1 of 5 APS sensors used in the monochrome scanner unit to detect the size of the original S APS Sensor 4 Original Length Mono 1 of 5 APS sensors used in the monochrome scanner unit to detect the size of the original S APS Sensor 5 Original Length Mono 1 of 5 APS sensors used in the monochrome scanner unit to detect the size of the original EU only S Scanner HP Sensor Mo...

Page 498: ...n to email LAN faxing IP faxing Internet faxing and other functions PCB IPU Image Processing Unit Performs image processing PCB LSDB Laser Synchronization Detection Board Detects when the laser is about to start another main scan across the OPC drum PCB LDD Laser Diode Driver Controls the laser diodes PCB PSU Power Supply Unit Provides dc power to the system and ac power to the fusing lamp and hea...

Page 499: ...ng Lamp Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum surface after cleaning L Secondary Fusing Lamp Heats both ends of the hot roller L Main Fusing Lamp Heats the center of the hot roller L Exposure Lamp Mono Monochrome scanner unit Applies high intensity light to the original for exposure L Exposure Lamp Color Color scanner unit Applies high intensity light to the original for exposure Heaters H1...

Page 500: ...ming around the paper trays H Anti Condensation Heater Option Turns on when the main power switch is off to prevent moisture from forming on the optics TH Thermistor Sub Reads the temperature at the end of the hot roller These readings are used for fusing temperature control TH Thermistor Main Reads the temperature at the center of the hot roller These readings are used for fusing temperature cont...

Page 501: ...D017 D018 D019 D020 Detailed Descriptions 6 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Scanner Drive Motor 2 Main Motor 3 Registration Clutch 4 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 5 Upper Transport Clutch 6 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 7 Lower Transport Clutch ...

Page 502: ...IN BOARDS Here is a summary of the new features of the boards in this machine For more details please refer to the point to point diagram provided with the machine BCU Base Engine Control Unit This is the scanner and engine control board It controls the following functions ...

Page 503: ...ts for the GW controller and FCU The ICIB Illegal Copy Interface Board also connects directly to the IPU Scanner Board Mono or Color The machine can have either a black and white or color scanner unit Although the machine does not print color the color scanner provides color scanning for applications such scan to email scan to PDF etc Either unit is installed not both SBU Sensor Board Unit Convert...

Page 504: ...he controller The fax option however requires installation of an FCU ASCI 1 Contains the dedicated GW controller chips of the shared resources the CPU memory and HDD hardware for the copying and printing functions CPU RM7035 533MHz The central processing unit that controls the operation of the controller board HDD The interface for connection of the flat film cable connection to the HDD unit DDR S...

Page 505: ...LB or Cumin M Flash ROM Stores the program Maximum capacity 128 MB USB The interface for USB 2 0 devices Supports both low speed and high speed modes USB support is built into the controller No installation is required for the USB function But SP5985 001 must be set to 1 to enable the network functions NIB The Ethernet interface connection Network support is built into the controller No installati...

Page 506: ...scanned once only and stored to the memory 2 Drum Charge In the dark the charge roller gives a negative charge to the organic photo conductive OPC drum The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark 3 Laser Exposure The processed data scanned from the original is retrieved from the memory and transferred to the drum by a laser beam ...

Page 507: ...Image Transfer Paper is fed to the area between the drum surface and the transfer roller at the proper time for aligning the copy paper and the developed image on the drum surface Then the transfer roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper At the same time the paper is electrostatically...

Page 508: ...anner lamp The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners The sensor board converts the CCD analog signals into digital signals When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass the scanner motor pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage The original is scanned from left to right When the original is fed from the optional ARDF it is ...

Page 509: ...can direction is done by changing the scanner motor speed In the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board You can adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction by changing the scanner motor speed with SP4 008 ARDF mode The scanners always stay in their home position the scanner HP sensor F detects the 1st scanner to scan the original The ARDF motor feeds the origin...

Page 510: ... length The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the platen cover sensor C is activated as it is closed It detects the original size by the on off signals it gets from each sensor If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open the SBU controller on the SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is pressed ...

Page 511: ...inal size sensor This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre scan and increases the machine s productivity However if the by pass tray is used the machine assumes that the copy paper is lengthwise L For example if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by pass tray the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area Information from the original size sensors is disre...

Page 512: ...gnal to an 8 bit digital signal then it sends the digital signal to the IPU Image Processing Unit board The IPU board performs the image processing such as auto shading filtering magnification gradation processing The ASIC on the controller board performs the image editing such as image repeat double copy Finally the IPU board sends the video data to the LD drive board ...

Page 513: ...nalog processing IC performs the following operations on the signals from the CCD 1 Z C Zero Clamp Adjusts the black level reference for even pixels to match the odd pixels 2 Signal Amplification The analog signal is amplified by operational amplifiers in the AGC circuit 3 Auto Gain Control Adjusts the gain curve for the scanned image density After the above processing the analog signals are conve...

Page 514: ...ch color R G B and 2 analog signals per line ODD EVEN are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital signals in the 10 bit A D converter This is the first phase of processing the data scanned from the original Storing Operation Settings The controller stores the SBU settings These values must be restored after the lens block is replaced SP4 008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment ...

Page 515: ...bleshoot problems in the SBU SP4907 001 SBU Pattern Test Pattern change To print the pattern Select the pattern to print Touch Copy Window then press the Start key twice 6 5 3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY ADS prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies The copier scans the auto image density detection area A as shown in the diagram This corresponds to a few mm at one end of the main scan...

Page 516: ...have three different settings Glossy Photo Printed Photo Copied Photo etc To display this screen press the User Tools Counter button press Copier Document Server Settings on the display panel press the General Features tab and then press Original Photo Type Priority Mode Function Text Best reproduction of text and sharp lines Ignores background texture Text Photo Good reproduction of mixed text an...

Page 517: ...d disk has been installed the machine uses binary picture processing However when the optional hard disk has been installed the machine uses grayscale processing The user or technician cannot select the mode 6 5 5 IPU IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT Overview The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU Image Processing Unit ICs on the IPU board which does the following processes on the image data IPU A Auto ...

Page 518: ... Processing D017 D018 D019 D020 6 28 SM Binary picture processing Error diffusion Dithering Video Controller Video path control GAVD FCI Fine Character and Image The image data then goes to the LD driver LDD ...

Page 519: ...rical lens C The shield glass D prevents dust from reaching the polygon mirror Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects one full main scan line The laser beam goes to the F theta mirror E mirror F and BTL barrel toroidal lens G Then the laser beam goes to the drum through the toner shield glass H The laser synchronizing detector I determines the main scan starting position The speed of the poly...

Page 520: ...itors the current passing through the laser diode LD The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level from the reference circuit This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while the laser diode is active The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit ...

Page 521: ...vent the laser beam from inadvertently switching on during servicing safety switches are located at the front and right covers The switches are installed on the 5VLD line coming from the power supply unit through the BCU and IPU boards When the front cover or the right cover is opened the power supply to the laser diode is interrupted ...

Page 522: ...l 3 Pick off Pawl 4 OPC Drum 5 ID Sensor see the note below this list 6 Development Roller 7 Development Unit 8 Charge Roller 9 Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 10 Quenching Lamp see the note below this list These parts are not included in the PCU The machine informs the user when the PCU life has finished However the user can continue to make copies SP5 912 can be used to enable or disable this warn...

Page 523: ...ries of gears a timing belt C and the drum drive shaft D The main motor assembly includes a drive controller which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation speed is out of the specified range The fly wheel E on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed this prevents banding and jitter from appearing on copies ...

Page 524: ...pier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum The drum charge roller A always contacts the surface of the drum B to give it a negative charge of 900V The high voltage supply board gives a negative dc voltage to the drum charge roller through the spring C and terminal plate D ...

Page 525: ...eters are balanced so that any small change in drum potential caused by environmental effects is reflected in a change in the amount of toner transferred to the drum This measurement is made immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density control Immediately after making ID sensor pattern A the charge roller voltage stays on but the development bias goes up to 650V as a result the drum p...

Page 526: ...e drum charge voltage by 50 V 6 8 3 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING The ID sensor pattern is made in the following conditions When the machine is turned on or returns from the energy save mode and the hot roller temperature is less than 30 C The temperature threshold can be adjusted with SP2995 001 After the total number of prints exceeds 300 pages If this total is exceeded during a job the pa...

Page 527: ... of the following parts 1 Development roller 2 Mixing auger 2 3 TD sensor 4 Mixing auger 1 5 Doctor blade This machine uses a single roller development system Two mixing augers mix the developer The toner density TD sensor and image density ID sensor see the illustration in the PCU section are used to control toner density ...

Page 528: ...s pushed in the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear The development drive gears except for the gears in the development unit are helical gears These gears are quieter than normal gears 6 9 3 DEVELOPER MIXING This copier uses 2 mixing augers A and B to keep the developer evenly mixed Mixing auger 2 A transports excess developer scraped off the development roller C by the ...

Page 529: ...itive development system in which black areas of the latent image are at a low negative charge about 150 50 V and white areas are at a high negative charge about 950 V To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the drum the high voltage supply board applies a bias of 650 volts to the development rollers throughout the image development process The bias is applied...

Page 530: ...riginal position the cap F on the toner bottle is pulled away and kept in place by the chuck G The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development unit The toner bottle has a spiral groove H that helps move toner to the development unit When the bottle holder unit is pulled out to add a new toner bottle the following happens automatically to prevent toner from scattering...

Page 531: ...utter E above the PCU is opened by the machine frame Then the toner falls down into the development unit through the slit and the shutter 6 9 6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL Overview There are four modes for controlling toner supply as shown in the following tables The mode can be changed with by SP2 921 The factory setting is sensor control 1 mode Basically toner density is controlled using the standard ...

Page 532: ...development unit when Vt is higher than the reference voltage Vts or Vref This mode keeps the Vref value for use the next toner density control Vts is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU has been installed until it has been corrected with the ID sensor output Vref is used after Vts has been corrected with the ID sensor output voltage corrected during the first toner density co...

Page 533: ...oltage Vts or Vref Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1 mode Toner supply amount Fixed SP2 925 Toner end detection Performed Mode Fixed control 2 SP2 921 3 Use temporarily if the TD sensor needs to be replaced Toner supply decision None Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt Toner supply amount Fixed SP2 925 Toner end...

Page 534: ...the reflectivity of both the drum surface and the pattern on the drum are checked This compensates for any variations in the reflectivity of the pattern on the drum or the reflectivity of the drum surface The ID sensor pattern is made on the drum by the charge roller and laser diode Vsp Vsg is not detected every page or job it is detected at the following times to decide Vref When the machine is t...

Page 535: ...mode the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of SP2 925 and does not vary The default setting is 200 ms for each copy The toner supply motor on time for each value of SP2 925 is as follows SP2 925 Motor On Time t 200 ms 0 t 1 2t 2 4t 3 8t 4 12t 5 16t 6 Continuously 7 Not supplied For sensor control modes 1 and 2 the toner supply motor on time is decided by the following factors ...

Page 536: ... Vsp 1 0V ID sensor power required to make the standard output reaches the maximum value 254 The above ID sensor values can be checked using SP2 220 When this is detected the machine changes the value of Vref to the previous value then does the toner density control process in a similar way to sensor control mode 2 No SC code is generated if the ID sensor is defective TD Sensor The TD sensor is ch...

Page 537: ...he machine leaves the toner near end condition While in the toner recovery cycle supplying toner on and off for 30 s see the previous page after the machine has detected a toner near end condition During copying in the toner near end condition If the front cover is opened and closed for more than 10 seconds while a toner near end condition exists Toner End Detection There are two situations for en...

Page 538: ... toner remaining on the drum When toner builds up in the cleaning unit toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection coil B To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the cleaning blade the drum turns in reverse for about 5 mm at the end of every copy job This feature is controlled with SP 2 998 In addition cleaning is done in the middle of a job ...

Page 539: ...ns 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING Toner picked up by the toner collection coil A is transported to the opening B in the side of the PCU Then this toner falls into the development unit with new toner coming from the toner bottle and it is all mixed together by mixing auger 1 C and used again ...

Page 540: ...here are two standard paper trays Each tray holds 550 sheets Each tray uses a friction pad 4 to separate paper so that only one sheet feeds at a time The paper feed roller 2 and shaft do not separate from the tray when the tray is pulled out This prevents paper from getting caught inside the machine when a tray is removed The two relay sensors are used to detect paper jams The upper relay sensor 6...

Page 541: ...nd feed mechanism of both the first and second paper trays The paper feed clutches B transfer drive from this motor to the paper feed rollers C When the paper feed clutch activates the feed roller starts to feed the paper from the tray The paper feed clutch remains on until shortly after the registration sensor D activates ...

Page 542: ...et on top of the stack into the paper feed path The friction pad B stops the sheet below so that only one sheet feeds at a time A spring C pushes up the friction pad so that it applies constant pressure on the feed roller above The pressure exerted by the spring on the friction pad is constant and cannot be adjusted ...

Page 543: ...ottom plate pressure lever The lift motor F turns on and rotates clockwise The main pressure spring G pulls the bottom plate pressure lever This lifts the tray bottom plate When the top of the stack contacts the feed roller the motor can no longer raise the plate and the actuator H enters the gap of the lift sensor I and this stops the motor At this time the pressure of the feed roller on the pape...

Page 544: ...TION While there is paper in a paper tray the top of the paper stack lifts the feeler A which deactivates the paper end sensor B This signals paper present in the tray After the last sheet feeds the paper end feeler A drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and activates the paper end sensor This signals that the paper tray is empty When a paper tray is removed with no paper in the tray t...

Page 545: ...e registration To prevent this problem each side fence has a stopper A Each side fence can be secured with a screw B for customers who do not want to change the paper size End Fence When the amount of paper in the tray decreases the bottom plate C lifts gradually The end fence D is connected to the bottom plate When the tray bottom plate rises the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the...

Page 546: ...ing to the development unit via the drum cleaning unit The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be adjusted with SP 1003 If jams frequently occur after registration SP 1903 can be used to activate the relay clutch so that the relay roller assists the registration roller in feeding the paper When feeding from the by pass tray the by pass feed clutch activates and tu...

Page 547: ... adjusted for the loaded paper The readings of these three sensors are used with the reading of the side fence sensor D to determine the paper size The combination of these four readings is sent to the CPU to determine the size of the paper loaded in the tray The table below shows how the machine uses the on or off signals from the sensors to determine a paper size EUROPE ASIA L LOW OFF H HIGH ON ...

Page 548: ...364 x 357 H H H L LG SEF A3 SEF 420 x 297 L H H L DLT SEF Tray 2 Sensor Name W x L mm 1 2 3 4 SP Set SP1913 A6 SEF 148 x 105 L H L H A5 LEF 148 x 210 L H L L B6 SEF 182 x 128 H L H H B5 LEF 182 x 257 H L H L Exec LEF A5 SEF 210 x 148 H H L H HLT SEF A4 LEF 297 x 210 H H L L LT LEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 L L H H LT SEF 279 x 216 L L L L A4 SEF 297 x 210 H L L L B4 SEF 364 x 257 H H H L LG SEF A3 SEF 420 ...

Page 549: ...Exec LEF HLT SEF 216 x 140 H H L H A5 SEF LT LEF 216 x 279 H H L L A4 LEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 L L H H LT SEF 270 x 216 L L L L A4 SEF 297 x 210 H L L L LG SEF 356 x 216 H H H L B4 DLT SEF 432 x 279 L H H L A3 Tray 2 Sensor Name W x L mm 1 2 3 4 SP Set SP1913 A6 SEF 148 x 105 L H L H A5 LEF 148 x 210 L H L L B6 SEF 182 x 128 H L H H B5 LEF 182 x 257 H L H L Exec LEF HLT SEF 216 x 140 H H L H A5 SEF ...

Page 550: ...y installed the Add Paper indicator will light These SP codes allow you to select more precisely which size is detected in the tray An alternate size can be selected for each paper tray Auto Paper Size Detection SP Codes Tray Name SP Code Available Selections for Each SP 1st Tray 1912 2nd Tray 1913 3rd Tray 1 1914 4th Tray 2 1915 1 B5 or Executive LEF 2 A5 or Half Letter SEF 3 A4 or Letter LEF 4 A...

Page 551: ...tterns on the rectangular part of the paper size switch The patterns for each paper width in the paper size switch are unique North America CN No BCU 11 x 17 8 x 14 5 x 8 CN136 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CN136 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF CN136 3 GND OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CN136 4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON CN136 5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF Europe Asia CN No BCU A3 A4 SEF 8 x 13 A5 SEF CN136 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF CN136 2 OFF OF...

Page 552: ...The paper amount that remains in a tray is displayed on the LCD When the paper stack becomes smaller the bottom plate pressure lever C pushes an actuator up through the gaps in the paper height sensors This activates and deactivates the paper height sensors Four on off states are possible These on off combinations shown in the table below signal how much paper remains in a tray Paper Remaining Pap...

Page 553: ... tray It uses this information to make slight adjustments by raising or lowering the bottom plate with the stack lift motor to maintain the correct pressure against the feed roller Several SP codes can be used to adjust feed pressure based on these variables Paper size The paper size detectors tell the machine the paper size loaded in the tray Amount of paper remaining in the tray The paper height...

Page 554: ...y at 100 70 and 30 paper remaining to prevent a failure to feed The machine runs the tray lift motor in reverse for 100 ms 100 ms to lower the tray at 10 remaining to compensate for the lower weight of the smaller amount of paper remaining This prevents double feeding B5T HLT To keep the stack of this light paper at the correct pressure against the feed roller above The machine runs the tray lift ...

Page 555: ... codes see Service Tables If a particular paper size is consistently double feeding this means there is too much pressure between the feed roller and paper stack Increasing the reverse run time of the tray lift motor 300 to 500 for example should reduce the pressure and solve the problem If a particular paper size is consistently failing to feed this means there is not enough pressure between the ...

Page 556: ... 5 17muA A5 width 5 5 20muA Note that for the by pass tray the fusing and transfer conditions for special paper are also applied if the user uses thick non standard mode 6 11 12 TRAY LOCK MECHANISM A lock mechanism in each tray prevents it from coming out accidentally when the machine is moved Pulling on the sides of a tray will not open it A tray can be opened only by pulling on its handle to rel...

Page 557: ...ner from the drum onto the paper The current depends on the paper width paper type and paper feed tray The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate C help the paper to separate from the drum The high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage to the discharge plate Drive from the drum through a gear D turns the transfer roller 6 12 2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING There are two t...

Page 558: ...perature 15 C to 24 C Paper Width Paper Tray By pass Tray Normal Duplex 2nd Side By pass Tray Thick 2nd Paper Tray Special Paper A3 11 x 17 A4 8 5 x 11 sideways 14μA 10μA 14μA B4 13μA 12μA 15μA A4 11 x 8 5 lengthwise A5 5 5 x 8 5 sidewise 13μA 16μA 17μA A5 8 5 x 5 5 lengthwise and less 16μA 16μA 20μA The transfer current can be adjusted using SP2301 except for the low transfer current Be careful w...

Page 559: ...ault setting is off Just after the power is switched on After a copy jam has been cleared After 50 sheets have printed If a job is in progress when the number of prints exceeds 50 the machine enters cleaning mode at the completion of the current job the print job is not interrupted for cleaning The transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2 301 4 6 12 4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM T...

Page 560: ...ller strippers 9 Four thermostats 4 Pressure spring 10 Hot roller 5 Pressure roller 11 Paper overflow sensor 6 Cleaning roller The pressure lever applies the correct pressure at the nip between the pressure roller and hot roller When the lever is released the pressure roller moves away from the hot roller If a paper jam occurs in the fusing unit releasing this lever makes jam removal easier ...

Page 561: ...ate freely so that misfed paper can easily be removed Also the fusing drive is released by the fusing drive release solenoid F To reduce the warming up time the machine cuts the drive to the fusing unit during warming up Just after the main switch is turned on this solenoid is energized and the fusing unit drive gear D is disengaged However the fusing unit drive is not released when the temperatur...

Page 562: ...onstantly apply pressure between the hot roller B and the pressure roller C Applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs The spring is positioned at the top D as the default setting The user moves lever E when using thicker copy paper or envelopes to reduce the pressure between the hot and pressure rollers 6 13 5 CLEANING MECHANISM The cleaning roller A is alwa...

Page 563: ...ree page and 60 second limits can be adjusted with SP1 105 8 and 9 Note that the fusing temperature is higher if the user uses special paper in the 2nd tray or thick paper mode from the bypass tray Fusing Lamp Control When the fusing lamp power turns off and on this causes fluorescent lights in the room to flicker To reduce the flickering use the following SP modes Fusing temperature detection cyc...

Page 564: ...of the print job This feature is effective to counter flickering lights However generated noise increases if the setting is changed from the default If a radio or a TV is close by the machine the noise may have some effect on the image or sound 6 13 7 OVERHEAT PROTECTION If the hot roller temperature becomes higher than 231 C the CPU cuts off the power to the fusing lamp At the same time SC543 is ...

Page 565: ... Detailed Descriptions 6 13 8 PAPER EXIT The paper overflow detection sensor A is located at the paper exit section of the fusing unit When this sensor is activated the machine detects that the paper stack height exceeded a certain limit and stops printing ...

Page 566: ...as follows Energy saver mode Auto Off mode These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes Panel off timer energy saver mode timer User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Panel Off Timer Auto off timer User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Auto Off Timer 6 14 2 ENERGY SAVER MODE Entering the energy saver mode The operation manual uses the term panel off mode for the timer The machi...

Page 567: ...mand from an application e g to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC the fusing temperature rises to print the data Return to stand by mode If one of the following is done the machine returns to stand by mode The Clear Mode Energy Saver Mode key is pressed Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed An original is placed in the ADF The ADF is lifted A sheet of pap...

Page 568: ...ill supplied to all components When the machine detects a ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job the 24V supply is activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes the print job Off Mode The system 5V supply also turns off However 5VE 5V for energy saver mode is still activated When the machine detects a ringing signal off hook signal or receives...

Page 569: ...SPECIFICATIONS ...

Page 570: ......

Page 571: ...d Custom Custom Sizes W x L Tray 1 140 to 297 mm x 180 to 432 mm 5 5 to 11 75 x 7 to 17 Tray 2 100 to 297 mm x 148 to 432 mm 4 to 11 75 x 5 75 to 17 Bypass 90 to 305 mm x 148 to 1260 mm 35 to 12 x 5 75 to 50 Duplexing A5 HLT to A3 DLT Paper Weight Tray 1 60 to 105 g m2 14 28 lb Tray 2 52 to 107 g m2 14 28 lb Bypass 52 to 157 g m2 14 42 lb Duplex 60 to 105 g m2 14 28 lb Copy Speed D018 25 cpm A4 LE...

Page 572: ...y A4 smaller 500 Sheets face down B4 larger 250 Sheets face down Power Source NA 120V 60 Hz EU 220 to 240V 50 60 Hz Asia China Taiwan 110V 60 Hz Full System Operating Less than 1 4 KW Off Mode Less than 1 65 W Power Consumption Sleep Mode Less than 6 W NA Less than 6 5 W EU Dimensions w x d x h Standard No PTU 570 x 653 x 709 mm 22 4 x 25 7 x 30 in With PTU 570 x 653 x 980 mm 22 4 x 25 7 x 38 6 in...

Page 573: ...e only 40 db Operating Mainframe only 64 8 db D017 D019 67 6 db D018 D020 The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 Full System Mainframe ADF 1 bin Sorter Paper Tray Unit Duplex Unit Bridge Unit Finisher 7 1 2 OPTIONS ARDF D366 Size A3 to A5 DLT to HLT Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g m2 10 to 34 lb Size A3 to A5 DLT to HLT Paper Size Weight Duplex Weight 52 to 105 g m2 14 to 28 lb Ta...

Page 574: ...unit Power Consumption 50 W or less Dimensions W D H 550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm 21 7 x 19 3 x 4 7 Weight 10 kg 22 lb Duplex Unit D369 Paper Size Standard sizes A5 LEF to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 140 to 297 mm Length 182 to 432 mm Paper Weight 64 g m2 to 105 g m2 20 lb to 28 lb Tray Capacity 1 sheet Power Consumption 40 W Power Source DC 24 V 5 V Weight 7 kg Size W x D x H 160 x 490 x 5...

Page 575: ...ed Power Source DC 24 V 5 V Weight 3 kg Size W x D x H 430 x 110 x 240 mm Interchange Unit D371 Paper Size Standard sizes A6 LEF to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 135 g m2 16 lb to 36 lb Power Consumption 15 W Weight 1 6 kg Size W x D x H 117 x 447 x 92 mm 4 6 x 17 6 x 3 6 1 Bin Tray D367 Paper Size A5 LEF to A3 HLT to DLT Paper We...

Page 576: ...2 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 135 g m2 16 lb to 42 lb Power Source DC 24 V 5 V form copier Dimensions W x D x H 413 x 435 x 126 mm Weight 3 0 kg 6 6 lbs Shift Tray Unit D385 Paper Size Standard Size A5 LEF to A3 HLT LEF to DLT Non standard Size Width 90 to 297 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 60 to 105 g m2 16 to 28 lbs Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m2 20 lbs B4 or larger 250 sheets 80 g m2 20 ...

Page 577: ...ar end Power Source 24 Vdc and 5Vdc from the copier printer 120 Vac 120 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed 220 240 Vac 230 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed Max 28 W Copying printing 23 W Optional Tray Heater On Power Consumption Average 17 W Copying printing 15 W Optional Tray Heater On Weight 25 kg 55 lb Size W ...

Page 578: ... Face down Output Size 12 x18 A3 SEF to A6 SEF DLT to HLT SEF Shift sizes A3 SEF to B5 SEF A5 B6 A6 SEF labels possible Paper Thickness 52 g m2 45 K to 157 g m2 135 K Up to 253 g m2 220K without shift Stapling Stack Height for Stapling 50 sheets A4 LT and smaller 30 sheets B4 LG and larger Size A3 SEF to B5 SEF can be mixed if same width Stack Thickness 64g m2 45 K to 157 g m 135 K Stapling Positi...

Page 579: ...5 LT LEF 2 to 9 Sheets 55 to 27 10 to 50 Sheets 25 to 8 A4 B5 LT SEF 2 to 9 Sheets 55 to 27 10 to 30 Sheets 25 to 8 A3 B4 DLT LG Stacking Non Stapling Mode Vertical 15 mm or less Horizontal 15 mm or less Jogging Precision 2 to 30 Sheets 2 mm 31 to 50 Sheets 3 mm Dimensions w x d x h 396 x 551 x 276 mm 15 6 x 21 7 x 10 9 in Weight 12 kg 26 4 lb ...

Page 580: ...ize No staple mode A3 to B5 DLT to HLT Staple mode A3 B4 A4 B5 DLT to LT Paper Weight No staple mode 60 to 157 g m2 16 to 42 lb Staple mode 64 to 90 g m2 17 to 24 lb Stapler Capacity 30 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG 50 sheets A4 B5 LEF LT No staple mode 1 000 sheets A4 LT or smaller 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG 80 g m2 20 lb Staple mode 80 g m2 20 lb number of sets Set Size 10 to 50 Size 2 to 9 10 ...

Page 581: ...8 x 20 5 x 31 1 1000 Sheet Finisher B793 Print Paper Size No punch mode A3 11 x 17 to A5 8 5 x 5 5 LEF Punch mode 2 holes A3 11 x 17 to B6 5 5 x 8 5 SEF or A4 8 5 x 11 to A5 8 5 x 5 5 LEF 3 holes A3 B4 11 x 17 SEF or A4 B5 8 5 x 11 LEF 4 holes Europe A3 B4 11 x 17 SEF or A4 B5 8 5 x 11 LEF 4 holes North Europe A3 11 x 17 to B6 5 5 x 8 5 SEF Staple mode A3 11 x 17 to B5 8 5 x 11 Paper Weight No pun...

Page 582: ... 500 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Staple capacity Single size 50 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 30 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Staple position 3 positions 1 staple 2 positions Top Left Top Right 2 staples 1 positions Staple replenishment Cartridge 5000 staples Power consumption 60 W Dimensions W x D x H 535 mm x 600 mm x 930 mm 21 1 x 23 6 x 36 6 Without punch unit 48 kg 105 8 lb Weight With punch...

Page 583: ...LARGE CAPACITY TRAY PS500 B391 ...

Page 584: ......

Page 585: ...FT 7 2 4 NEAR END END DETECTION 8 2 5 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE 9 2 6 LEFT TRAY REAR FENCE 9 2 7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION 10 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 11 3 1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME 11 3 2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR 11 3 3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE 12 3 4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR12 3 5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 13 3 6 TRAY MOTOR 14 3 7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND RELAY CLUTCH 15 3 8 PAPER FEED U...

Page 586: ......

Page 587: ...ize A4 sideways LT sideways Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 2 000 sheets 80 g m2 20lb Remaining Paper Detection 5 steps 100 75 50 25 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from copier printer Power Consumption 26 W Max 14 W Ave Weight 25 kg 55 lbs Size W x D x H 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm ...

Page 588: ...OMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Upper Limit Sensor 3 Paper Feed Roller 4 Relay Sensor 5 Relay Roller 6 Reverse Roller 7 Paper Height Sensors 1 2 3 8 Lower Limit Sensor 9 Left Paper End Sensor 10 Paper Height Sensors 4 5 B391D101 WMF 2 1 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 589: ... 8 Right Tray Paper End Sensor 9 Upper Limit Sensor 10 Relay Sensor 11 Side Fence Open Closed Sensors 12 Paper Height Sensors 1 2 3 13 Lower Limit Sensor 14 Side Fence Solenoid 15 Rear Fence Return Sensor 16 Rear Fence Motor 17 Rear Fence Home Position Sensor 18 Left Tray Paper End Sensor 19 Paper Height Sensors 4 5 20 Right Cover Switch B391D102 WMF B391D103 WMF 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1...

Page 590: ...r Limit Detects when the tray is completely lowered to stop the LCT motor 13 S5 Paper Height 1 2 3 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the right side of the tray 12 S6 Paper Height 4 5 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the left side of the tray 19 S7 Rear Fence Home Position Detects when the rear fence is at H P 17 S8 Tray Switch Detects whether the tray is correctly set 2 S9 Side Fenc...

Page 591: ... PAPER FEED This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism The paper feed unit consists of the pickup roller A paper feed roller B reverse roller C and grip and transport rollers There is a torque limiter in the back of the reverse roller ferrite powder type B391D104 WMF A B C ...

Page 592: ...matically When the paper tray A is not inside the machine the reverse roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is set into the machine it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller D to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and the reverse roller B to move up and contact the paper feed roller B3...

Page 593: ... the upper limit sensor the sensor turns off and the lift motor stops When paper in the tray is used up the pick up roller is gradually lowered and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor turning the sensor on When this happens the lift motor begins turning again The tray will then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor turning the sensor off again When the tray is removed f...

Page 594: ...am on the previous page When there is no paper in both trays paper end is detected The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor outputs as shown in the following table Paper end sensor 1 Low no paper High paper present Other sensors Low paper present High no paper Amount of paper 100 75 50 Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Paper Height Sensor 3 Paper End Senso...

Page 595: ...sensor D detects when the side fence is closed When it is not closed the user is prompted at the operation panel to free the mechanism 2 6 LEFT TRAY REAR FENCE If the right tray paper end sensor detects that there is no paper in the tray while the left tray sensor detects that there is still paper in the left tray the right side fence C opens and the rear fence motor H turns on The rear fence of t...

Page 596: ... pushes up the paper end feeler B and causes the actuator to come between the LED and photo diode of the sensor When paper runs out the feeler drops and the actuator leaves the photointerruptor and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray When the tray is being pulled out the lever E lifts the pick up roller and this also lifts up the feeler B391D106 WMF B391D111 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 597: ...the tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in making sure to keep the tray level 3 2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR 1 Pull out the large capacity tray 2 Remove the left tray rear side fence A 2 screws 3 Remove the rear fence bracket B 1 screw 4 Remove the connector of the rear fence HP sensor 5 Replace the rear fence HP sensor C 1 screw NOTE When securing the sensor in place be sure to fasten th...

Page 598: ...y can then be changed with an SP mode NOTE When securing the right tray side fence fasten the screw after setting the paper in the right tray and adjusting the fence to the width of the paper 3 4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR 1 Pull out the large capacity tray 2 Remove the left tray side fence A 2 screws 3 Remove the rear fence bracket B 1 screws 4 Replace the left tray paper end sensor C 1 connector...

Page 599: ...OR SM 13 B391 Large Capacity Tray B391 3 5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Remove the brackets 1 screw for each 2 Remove the rear cover A 2 screws 3 Remove the tray lift motor B 3 screws 1 connector B391R105 WMF B391R106 WMF A B ...

Page 600: ...TRAY MOTOR B391 14 SM 3 6 TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove bracket 1 A 2 screws 3 Remove bracket 2 B 2 screws 4 Remove the tray motor C 6 screws 1 connector B391R107 WMF A C B ...

Page 601: ...ELAY CLUTCH 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove bracket 1 A 2 screws 3 Remove bracket 2 B 2 screws 4 Remove all bushings 5 Remove the paper feed clutch C and relay clutch D 6 Replace the required clutch NOTE Make sure to properly secure both clutches before completing installation B391R108 WMF A D B C ...

Page 602: ...tch and relay clutch see Paper Feed Clutch and Relay Clutch Replacement 2 Remove pulleys A A B B and C C 3 Remove the paper feed harness from the main board 4 Open the vertical transport guide plate D 5 Remove the paper feed unit E 2 screws B391R109 WMF B391R110 WMF A B C E D ...

Page 603: ... TRAY PAPER END AND RELAY SENSORS 1 Remove the paper feed unit see Paper Feed Unit Replacement 2 Replace the required sensor Upper limit A Relay B Right tray paper end C NOTE When replacing the upper limit A and paper end sensor C please be sure to do so while pushing the release lever D B391R111 WMF A B C D ...

Page 604: ...1 screw This is in order to free the end fence D 5 Move the end fence to the right toward the center 6 Remove the end fence 1 screw 7 Remove the end fence bracket E 2 screws 8 Remove the bracket F 1 screw 9 Remove the bracket G of the rear fence motor assembly 2 screws 10 Remove the rear fence motor assembly 2 screws 11 Replace the motor H 1 connector B391R113 WMF B391R112 WMF B391R114 WMF B A E D...

Page 605: ...e Paper Tray Unit Replacement 2 Remove the snap ring 1 each for the paper feed and reverse rollers 3 Remove the pick up roller A 4 Replace each roller B C NOTE Install the paper feed rollers the correct way round as shown in the illustration If the rollers are installed incorrectly this will cause the one way clutch to lock B391R115 WMF A B C ...

Page 606: ......

Page 607: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 B408 ...

Page 608: ......

Page 609: ... 7 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 1 JAM DETECTION 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 9 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 10 4 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 10 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 4 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 13 4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 5 JUNCTION GATES 16 Upper Tray Mode 16 Sort Stack Mode 16 Staple Mode 16 4 6 UPPER TRAY 17 4 7 LOWER TRAY UP DOWN MECHANISMS 18 4 8 PAPER...

Page 610: ......

Page 611: ...urn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section NOTE This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring 1 1 MAIN PCB 1 Rear cover A x 2 2 Main PCB B x 4 All B408R110 WMF B408R109 WMF B A ...

Page 612: ...it guide plate B 3 Upper side cover C x 2 4 Front cover support plate D x 1 5 Front cover E 6 Front inner cover F x 2 7 Harness G 8 Unhook the spring H 9 Turn the stapler unit I and take it out 10 Bracket J x 2 B408R102 WMF B408R113 WMF B408R114 WMF A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 613: ...000 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS SM 3 B408 1 3 MOTORS 1 3 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 1 1 3 2 STAPLER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Stapler motor A x 2 x 1 B408R123 WMF B408R124 WMF A A ...

Page 614: ...ANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor assembly A x 4 x 2 3 Upper transport motor B x 4 4 Exit motor C x 4 1 3 4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Main PCB 1 1 2 Lower transport motor A x 2 x 1 B408R112 WMF B408R111 WMF A B C A ...

Page 615: ... AND SENSORS 1 4 1 PREPARATION 1 Front cover and inner cover 1 2 2 Upper side cover A x 2 3 Upper tray B x 1 4 Lower side cover C x 2 5 Loosen the 2 screws D 6 Lower the lower tray guide plate E 7 Guide plate F x 4 B408R116 WMF B408R117 WMF B408R118 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 616: ...ND SENSORS B408 6 SM 1 4 2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1 Stack height sensor assembly A x 1 2 Stack height sensor B x 1 1 4 3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Stapler tray paper sensor A x 1 B408R121 WMF B408R120 WMF A B A ...

Page 617: ...00 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS AND SENSORS SM 7 B408 1 4 4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Lower tray lift motor A x 2 x 1 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 1 Stack feed out motor A x 2 x 1 B408R119 WMF B408R122 WMF A A ...

Page 618: ... off Tray exit sensor Off check The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within the normal time after the entrance sensor switched on Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Lower t...

Page 619: ...the table below SW100 1 2 Description 0 0 Normal operation mode Default 1 0 Packing mode Before packing the machine do the following Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero The lower tray moves to the lowest position Then turn off the main switch After unpacking the machine do the following After turning the main switch back on the lower tray returns to home position automatically ...

Page 620: ...per Tray Exit Roller 3 Entrance Roller 4 Tray Junction Gate 5 Upper Transport Roller 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Lower Transport Rollers 8 Stapler 9 Stack Feed out Belt 10 Positioning Roller 11 Shift Roller 12 Lower Tray 13 Lower Tray Exit Roller B408D101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 621: ...ight Sensor 8 Lower Tray Exit Sensor 9 Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10 Shift HP Sensor 11 Shift Motor 12 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid 14 Stapler HP Sensor 15 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 16 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor 17 Stapler Hammer Motor 18 Staple Sheet Sensor 19 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor 20 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor 21 Staple Sensor B408D102 WMF B408D103 WMF 1 2 3...

Page 622: ...Lower Tray Lift Motor 24 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25 Stapler Motor 26 Jogger Fence Motor 27 Stack Feed out Motor 28 Main Board 29 Lower Transport Motor 30 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31 Exit Motor 32 Upper Transport Motor B408D104 WMF 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 29 30 31 32 ...

Page 623: ...2 S3 Jogger Fence HP Detects when the jogger fence is at home position 12 S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position 10 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP Detects when the stack feed out belt is at home position 19 S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position 14 S7 Exit Guide Plate HP Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position 5 S8 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects c...

Page 624: ...ller 13 Switches SW1 Lower Tray Upper Limit Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position 9 SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened 6 SW3 Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is opened 1 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier printer 28 ...

Page 625: ...4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Exit Motor 2 Upper Transport Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Shift Motor 5 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6 Lower Tray Lift Motor 7 Stack Feed out Motor 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor B408D105 WMF B408D106 WMF B408D107 WMF 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 626: ...te solenoid C and stapler junction gate solenoid D Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off The copies go up to the upper tray Sort Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid remains off The copies are sent to the lower tray directly Staple Mode The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on The...

Page 627: ...0 Sheet Finisher B408 UPPER TRAY SM 17 B408 4 6 UPPER TRAY When the paper limit sensor A switches on during feed out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper paper overflow is detected B408D109 WMF A ...

Page 628: ... removed the stack height sensor F turns off and the tray lifts up Then the tray stops when the sensor turns on again the tray pushes up the feeler If the stack height sensor fails the lower tray upper limit switch G detects the tray and stops the motor This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure Sort Stack Mode Tray Down Every five sheets of paper the tray goes down until the sen...

Page 629: ...er transport roller the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the link D After the paper is delivered to the lower tray E the shift roller moves to its home position which is detected by the shift HP sensor F Then when the trailing edge of the next copy passes the upper transport roller the shift roller shifts again This operation is done every sheet When the trailing edge of each p...

Page 630: ...ioning roller C pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper D For the horizontal paper alignment the jogger front fence E and the rear fence F move to the waiting position which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper When aligning the paper vertically the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the waiting position After the vertical position has been aligned the jogger fence pushes the pap...

Page 631: ...late A is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers This operation is done for all paper sizes but is only needed for the larger sizes The exit guide plate motor B and exit roller release cam C control the exit guide plate movement When the exit guide plate motor starts the cam turns and the exit guide plate moves up When stapling is finished the exit guide plate motor turns on again to clos...

Page 632: ... or no staples in the staple cartridge staple end is indicated on the operation panel The stapler sensor C detects this The stapler rotation HP sensor D checks whether the staple hammer mechanism returns to home position after each stack has been stapled When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor the copier detects a staple jam When a staple jam has occurred the jammed staple is ins...

Page 633: ...om its home position to the stapling position If two staple position mode is selected the stapler moves to the front stapling position first then moves to the rear stapling position However for the next copy set it staples in the reverse order at the rear side first then at the front side After the job is completed the stapler moves back to its home position The stapler HP sensor B detects this B4...

Page 634: ... to the shift roller The shift roller takes over stack feed out after the leading edge reaches this roller Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor the stack feed out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to the lower tray Then the stack feed out motor turns on again until the pawl B actuates the stack feed out belt home position s...

Page 635: ...BOOKLET FINISHER SR3000 B793 ...

Page 636: ......

Page 637: ...IT SENSOR 7 1 2 6 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR 8 1 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 8 1 2 8 ENTRANCE MOTOR 9 1 2 9 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR 9 1 2 10 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 10 1 2 11 SHIFT MOTOR 11 1 3 FOLDER 12 1 3 1 STAPLE FOLDER UNIT 12 1 3 2 FOLDER UNIT 13 1 3 3 FOLDER UNIT EXIT SENSOR 14 1 3 4 FOLDER UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR 15 1 3 5 STAPLER UNIT 15 1 4 OTHERS 26 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 26 1 5 DIP SWITCHES 27 2 DETAILED SEC...

Page 638: ...R BOOKLET STAPLING 49 2 9 1 OVERVIEW 49 2 9 2 8 5 X 14 LEGAL OR SHORTER 49 2 9 3 LONGER THAN 8 5 X 14 INCHES 50 2 10 MOVING THE STACK TO THE FOLDING POSITION 52 2 11 FOLDER 53 2 11 1 OVERVIEW 53 2 11 2 FOLD PLATE 53 2 11 3 FOLD ROLLERS 54 2 12 PUNCH UNIT 55 2 12 1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION 55 2 12 2 PAPER POSITION DETECTION 57 2 12 3 PUNCH UNIT MOVEMENT 58 2 12 4 PUNCH SELECTION AND FIRING 58 2 12 5 P...

Page 639: ...er switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual When taking apart the bridge unit first take the unit out of the copier Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 640: ......

Page 641: ...Covers SM 1 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 FRONT INNER REAR COVERS 1 Remove the front cover A x 1 2 Remove the inner cover B x 2 ...

Page 642: ...Covers B793 2 SM 3 Remove the rear cover C x 2 1 1 2 UPPER COVERS 1 Remove the upper cover A x 1 2 Remove the proof tray B x 4 ...

Page 643: ...Covers SM 3 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 3 Remove the upper left cover C ...

Page 644: ...DY 1 2 1 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the positioning roller A x 1 1 2 2 SHIFT TRAY POSITION SENSOR UPPER LIMIT SWITCH 1 Remove the following items Front Cover Inner Cover Rear Cover Proof Tray Upper Left Cover ...

Page 645: ...the lower guide unit A x 4 x 2 3 Remove the shift tray position sensor B x 1 4 Remove the upper limit switch C x 2 Pull it out from the assembly 1 2 3 PROOF TRAY EXIT FULL SENSOR 1 Remove the front cover rear cover and proof tray 2 Open the upper cover ...

Page 646: ...he vertical transport guide A x 4 4 Remove the exit sensor B x 1 5 Remove the tray full sensor C x 1 1 2 4 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Remove the finisher entrance sensor with bracket A x 1 2 Remove the finisher entrance sensor B x 1 ...

Page 647: ...Main Body SM 7 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 1 2 5 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Remove the front cover and upper left cover 2 Remove the link A x 1 3 Remove the exit guide unit B 4 Remove the sensor C x 1 ...

Page 648: ...APLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Open the front cover 2 Pull out the staple fold unit 3 Remove the staple tray paper sensor A x 1 1 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the front cover and then pull out the staple fold unit ...

Page 649: ...r B793 3 Remove the two gears A B 4 Remove the shift tray motor C x 2 x 1 1 2 8 ENTRANCE MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the entrance motor B x 2 x 1 1 2 9 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover ...

Page 650: ...B793 10 SM 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the upper transport motor B x 2 x 1 1 2 10 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Release the belt tension A 3 Remove the lower transport motor B x 2 x 1 ...

Page 651: ...Main Body SM 11 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 1 2 11 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the shift motor with bracket A x 1 x 4 3 Remove the shift motor B x 1 ...

Page 652: ...Folder B793 12 SM 1 3 FOLDER 1 3 1 STAPLE FOLDER UNIT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect all connectors and release the harness A for the staple folder unit x 1 x 3 3 Open the front cover ...

Page 653: ...793 Booklet Finisher B793 4 Pull out and remove the staple folder unit B x 2 1 3 2 FOLDER UNIT 1 Remove the staple folder unit 2 Remove the knobs A x 1 each 3 Disconnect the connectors 4 Remove the folder unit B x 4 ...

Page 654: ...lder B793 14 SM 1 3 3 FOLDER UNIT EXIT SENSOR 1 Remove the folder unit 2 Remove the folder unit upper cover A x 1 3 Remove the lower clamp roller unit B x 4 4 Remove the folder unit exit sensor C x 1 x 1 ...

Page 655: ...RANCE SENSOR 1 Open the front cover 2 Pull out the staple folder unit 3 Remove the exit cover A x 2 4 Remove the entrance sensor B x 1 x 1 1 3 5 STAPLER UNIT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and release the harness x 2 2 3 Remove two screws 3 ...

Page 656: ...Folder B793 16 SM 4 Open the front cover and pull out the staple folder unit 4 5 Disconnect the connectors and release the harness 4 connectors 5 1 clamp 6 ...

Page 657: ...Folder SM 17 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 6 Remove a connector 7 7 Remove 2 screws 8 ...

Page 658: ...Folder B793 18 SM 8 Remove the staple tray 9 9 Remove the guide 10 2 screws ...

Page 659: ...Folder SM 19 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 10 Move the stapler unit until its screw come to the hole 11 on the stay 11 Remove the screw 12 that holds the front of the guide plate 13 ...

Page 660: ...Folder B793 20 SM 12 Remove the screw 14 that holds the rear of the guide plate Remove the rear side screw through the hole in the stay ...

Page 661: ...Folder SM 21 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 13 Remove the guide plate 13 14 Remove the staple folding unit 15 3 screws 2 connectors ...

Page 662: ...Folder B793 22 SM 15 Remove the staple cartridge 16 16 Remove the stapler unit cover 17 17 Remove the stapler drive unit 18 ...

Page 663: ...Folder SM 23 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 Reassembly 1 Mount the stapler drive unit 1 2 Mount the staple folder unit 2 Do not tighten the screws 3 at this time ...

Page 664: ...Folder B793 24 SM 3 Set the special tool in the long hole 4 on both units 4 Secure the special tool 5 with the knob 6 ...

Page 665: ...Folder SM 25 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 5 Tighten the screws 7 for the stapler folder unit 6 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 666: ...Others B793 26 SM 1 4 OTHERS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the main board A x 5 ...

Page 667: ...ition No Function 1 ON 0 2 mm 2 ON 0 4 mm 3 ON 0 8 mm 4 Direction OFF Towards the trailing edge ON Towards the leading edge SW102 Move the tray position No Function 1 OFF ON OFF Turn the switch from off to on then turn it to off again Then the tray moves down to the shipping position 2 Not used After you change any of these dip switch settings open and close the finisher cover to activate the new ...

Page 668: ...OMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Proof Tray 2 Shift Tray 3 Exit Guide Plate 4 Stack Feed Out Belt 5 Staple Unit 6 Booklet Tray 7 Proof Tray Exit Roller 8 Proof Tray Junction Gate 9 Punch Unit 10 Staple Tray Junction Gate 11 Positioning Roller 12 1st Clamp Roller 13 2nd Clamp Roller 14 Folder Plate 15 Folder Roller ...

Page 669: ...Component Layout SM 29 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 Drive Layout 1 Upper Transport Motor 2 Entrance Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Fold Plate Motor 5 Fold Roller Motor 6 Stack Feed out Motor ...

Page 670: ...Exit Guide Plate Motor 3 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 4 Upper Limit Switch 5 Shift Tray Position Sensor 6 Rear Booklet Tray Full Sensor 7 Front Booklet Tray Full Sensor 8 Proof Tray Full Sensor 9 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 10 Entrance Sensor 11 Front Door Safety Switch 12 Staple Tray Exit Sensor ...

Page 671: ...ay Gate Solenoid 14 Lower Transport Motor 15 Entrance Motor 16 Positioning Roller Solenoid 17 Main Board 18 Shift Tray Motor 19 Lower Limit Sensor 20 Upper Cover Sensor 21 Staple Tray Gate Solenoid 22 Upper Transport Motor 23 Shift Motor 24 Shift Motor HP Sensor ...

Page 672: ...t Exit Sensor 39 Lower Clamp Roller HP Sensor 40 Lower Retraction Motor 41 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor 42 Bottom Fence HP Sensor 43 Fold Cam HP Sensor 44 Fold Roller Motor 45 Fold Plate HP Sensor 46 Fold Plate Motor 47 Bottom Fence Lift Motor ...

Page 673: ...3 48 Punch Motor 49 Punch Encoder Sensor 50 Punch HP Sensor 51 Punch Board 52 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor 53 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor 54 Paper Position Sensor 55 Punch Movement HP Sensor 56 Punch Hopper Full Sensor 57 Punch Movement Motor ...

Page 674: ...determine when the booklet tray is full Front Booklet Tray Full Sensor 7 One of two sensors that the machine uses to determine when the booklet tray is full Proof Tray Full Sensor 8 Detects when the proof tray is full Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 9 Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position Entrance Sensor 10 Detects when paper comes into the finisher Staple Tray Exit Sensor 12 Detects pa...

Page 675: ...t feeds out correctly Lower Clamp Roller HP Sensor 39 Detects when the lower clamp roller is at home position Fold Unit Entrance Sensor 41 Detects 1 the leading edge of the stack during booklet stapling and 2 also used to signal an alarm if a paper is detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier is turned on Bottom Fence HP Sensor 42 Detects when the bottom fence of the booklet foldin...

Page 676: ...de Plate Motor 2 Controls the exit guide plate mechanism Lower Transport Motor 14 Controls the positioning roller and other rollers in the finisher see Drive Layout for details Entrance Motor 15 Controls the rollers at the entrance of the finisher Shift Tray Motor 18 Moves the shift tray up and down Upper Transport Motor 22 Controls the rollers that feed paper from the junction gate to the proof t...

Page 677: ...y the fold rollers Fold Roller Motor 44 Controls the rollers that fold the paper Fold Plate Motor 46 Controls the plate that makes the fold in the paper Bottom Fence Lift Motor 47 Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the correct fold position for the paper size Punch Motor 48 Punches the holes in the paper Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor 52 Controls side to side movement of the paper pos...

Page 678: ...em No Purpose Front Door Safety Switch 11 Cuts dc power when the front door is opened Others Item No Purpose Staple Driver Unit 31 Pushes the staples into the paper Staple Folder Unit 32 Folds the ends of the staples after stapling ...

Page 679: ...TES Two junction gates control the path of paper Each junction gate is controlled by a solenoid Junction gate operation is summarized in the following table Mode Proof Shift Staple Paper Path Proof Tray Gate Solenoid ON OFF OFF Staple Tray Gate Solenoid OFF OFF ON ...

Page 680: ...Tray Gate Solenoid Roller Drive Proof Tray Exit Roller B Proof Tray Transport Roller C Controlled by the Upper Transport Motor Entrance Roller D Transport Roller E Controlled by the Entrance Motor Jam Detection Proof Tray Exit Sensor F Tray Full Detection Proof Tray Full Sensor G ...

Page 681: ...the tray moves up too far and cuts power to the shift tray motor The shift tray position sensor C checks when the tray or the top of the stack is at the correct height to receive paper Shift Mode This is checked every 5 sheets Staple Mode This is checked every stack The lower limit sensor D detects when the tray is full At this point the tray cannot move down any more ...

Page 682: ...e The shift motor HP sensor C detects when the mechanism is at home position The upper transport motor rotates the shift roller When shift mode is used the shift motor turns on after each page is fed out Then for the next set the shift motor turns the other way In this way the user can easily divide the sets ...

Page 683: ...ob stops until booklets are removed from the tray If the booklet tray is not installed this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode When booklet mode is selected the tray full message appears on the operation panel The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors when the actuator arm rises determines the number of ...

Page 684: ...ll sensors every feed out of a paper stack The machine checks a certain condition based on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet Two examples are shown below the table Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the lower tray can hold will vary greatly Lower Tray Full Condition Tables A3 DLT Sheet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Full 1 15 Cnt Full 2 3 Cnt 11 Cnt Full 3 16 Cnt 1...

Page 685: ...for the Full 1 condition If the Full 1 condition occurs 15 times 15 Cnt in the table above the machine detects that the tray is full After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4 LT paper the machine checks every feed out of a paper stack for the Full 2 condition If the Full 3 condition occurs 5 times 5 Cnt in the table above the machine detects that the tray is full ...

Page 686: ...er C onto the top of the sheet Then the lower transport motor turns on and the positioning roller rotates to push the sheet of paper against the stopper there are two stoppers stopper L or stopper S the one that is used depends on the paper size as we shall see later The jogger HP sensor D detects when the jogger fences are at home position away from the stack The staple tray exit sensor E detects...

Page 687: ...o prevent the paper running into the exit roller during stacking The exit guide plate motor B drives the exit guide plate The exit guide plate HP sensor C detects when the guide plate is at home position The stack feed out belt feeds out stapled stacks The pawl D on the belt moves the stack out to the exit The stack feed out motor E drives the belt The stack feed out HP sensor F detects when the b...

Page 688: ...the stapler moves to a starting position that depends on the paper size as follows 8 5 x 14 inches or shorter Rear side staple position Longer than 8 5 x 14 inches Center position When the stapler is at the center position bracket E releases stopper L which catches the bottom edge of the paper for booklet stapling with longer paper sizes This will be described in a later section If the stapler saf...

Page 689: ...n 8 5 x 14 inches Stopper L is used for paper that is longer than 8 5 x 14 inches In corner stapling mode the pawl on the stack feed out belt holds the stack of paper For booklet stapling this pawl stays at home position which is on the rear side so it does not interfere with booklet stapling 2 9 2 8 5 X 14 LEGAL OR SHORTER At the start of the set the upper retraction motor A turns on and stopper ...

Page 690: ...do this the upper clamp roller motor E rotates the upper clamp roller 2 9 3 LONGER THAN 8 5 X 14 INCHES At the start of the set the stapler moves to the center position At this position a bracket A on the stapler unit pushes stopper L B The pawl C on the stopper L assembly then moves into position to catch the paper The upper clamp roller holds the stack see the ...

Page 691: ...t Stapling SM 51 B793 Booklet Finisher B793 previous section When the stack is complete the stapler moves to the rear side position and stopper L moves away The machine feeds the stack to the correct position for stapling ...

Page 692: ...the leading edge of the stack reaches the bottom fence B this fence consists of two pawls that catch the paper The bottom fence moves the stack to the folding position The fold roller motor C turns the lower clamp roller The lower retracting motor D moves the lower clamp roller against and away from the stack The lower clamp roller HP sensor E detects when the lower clamp roller is moved to the ho...

Page 693: ...D PLATE A Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers B Fold Plate Motor Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate C Fold Plate Cam Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left into the nip of the fold rollers and right toward the fold plate home position D Fold Plate HP Sensor Controls operation of the fold plate motor E Fold Plat...

Page 694: ... to feed out the folded stack This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6136 G Fold Rollers Driven by the fold roller motor this roller pair feeds out the stack at its fold reverses to feed in the stack to and then feeds forward again assisted by the fold unit exit rollers not shown to feed out the stack to the lower tray ...

Page 695: ...tate This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew The finisher entrance roller starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit SP6130 This SP corrects the punch hole alignment To do this it corrects the skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off wh...

Page 696: ...the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers C the prescribed distance to put the paper under the punch unit D Using the result of the position calculation the punch unit control board moves the punch unit D to the adjusted punch position The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor m...

Page 697: ...R POSITION DETECTION The paper position sensor slide motor A extends and retracts the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor B The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge The detected position of the paper is used to move the punch unit across to the correct position for punching When the paper position slide is retracted the paper position slide HP sensor C...

Page 698: ...ects the position when it retracts switches off the punch movement motor and stops the punch unit at its home position The punch drive motor C fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below 2 12 4 PUNCH SELECTION AND FIRING The punch drive motor A turns the small notched encoder wheel B through the gap in the punch encoder sensor C The sensor output is used to control the punch timing ...

Page 699: ... hole punching This is the 1 position in the diagrams the first diagram is for 2 hole punching and the second diagram is for 3 hole punching Then the punch drive motor turns counter clockwise to the 2 position This movement punches the holes in the paper Then the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the 1 position to be ready for the next sheet of paper 2 12 5 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM The punchouts ...

Page 700: ...60 SM The punch hopper full sensor B does the following Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have collected in the hopper Detects when the punch hopper is set properly ...

Page 701: ...PAPER TRAY UNIT PB3030 D331 ...

Page 702: ......

Page 703: ... VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR 6 1 3 2 PAPER END SENSOR 7 1 3 3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 7 1 3 4 TRAY MAIN BOARD 8 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 9 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 10 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 10 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 13 2 2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM 14 2 3 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM 15 2 4 PAPER END DETECTION 17 2 5...

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 706: ......

Page 707: ...STMENT 1 1 COVERS AND ROLLER Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 1 1 COVERS Rear Cover 1 Hold brackets A x 1 each 2 Rear cover B x 3 Right Cover 1 Right side stopper C x 3 2 Right cover D x knob screw x 2 ...

Page 708: ...Covers and Roller D331 2 SM 1 1 2 FEED ROLLER 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Release the lock lever B 3 Feed roller C ...

Page 709: ...ain power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 2 1 UPPER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Bracket A x 2 3 Hold bracket B x 1 bushing x 1 4 Upper feed clutch C x 1 1 2 2 LOWER FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Lower feed clutch A x 1 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 710: ...331 4 SM 1 2 3 RELAY CLUTCH 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Relay clutch A x 1 x 1 1 2 4 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Tray main board Tray Main Board 3 Gear A x 1 4 Paper feed motor bracket B x 5 5 Paper feed motor C x 2 ...

Page 711: ...LIFT MOTORS Upper Lift Motor 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Spring A snap ring x 1 spacer x 1 3 Lift motor bracket B x 3 x 1 4 Upper lift motor C x 3 Lower Lift Motor 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Spring snap ring x 1 spacer x 1 3 Lift motor bracket x 4 x 1 4 Lower lift motor x 3 ...

Page 712: ...NENTS Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section 1 3 1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR 1 Open the tray cover A 2 Guide plate B x 2 3 Sensor bracket C x 1 x 1 4 Vertical transport sensor D hooks ...

Page 713: ...it PB3030 D331 1 3 2 PAPER END SENSOR 1 Pull out the tray A 2 Sensor bracket B x 1 x 1 3 Paper end sensor C hooks 1 3 3 PAPER SIZE SENSORS 1 Pull out the two trays 2 Sensor bracket cover A x 1 3 Sensor bracket B x 3 x 2 4 Paper size sensors hooks ...

Page 714: ...Electrical Components D331 8 SM 1 3 4 TRAY MAIN BOARD 1 Rear cover Covers 2 Tray main board A x 4 all s ...

Page 715: ...t PB3030 D331 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper paper feed roller 2 Lower paper feed roller 3 Lower bottom plate 4 Optional tray heater 5 Lower tray 6 Upper tray 7 Upper bottom plate ...

Page 716: ...elay clutch 9 Tray cover switch 10 Lower paper feed clutch 11 Lower paper height 2 sensor 12 Lower paper height 1 sensor 13 Vertical transport sensor 14 Lower tray set switch 15 Lower paper end sensor 16 Upper paper end sensor 17 Optional tray heater 18 Lower lift motor 19 Lower paper size sensors 20 Lower lift sensor 21 Upper paper size sensors 22 Tray main board 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRI...

Page 717: ... copier printer when the upper tray runs out of paper 16 S4 Lower Paper End Informs the copier printer when the lower tray runs out of paper 15 S5 Vertical Transport Detects misfeeds 13 S6 Upper Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 6 S7 Upper Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 5 S8 Lower Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray ...

Page 718: ...tects whether the lower tray is opened or not 14 Magnetic Clutches MC1 Upper Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the upper tray 7 MC2 Lower Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the lower tray 10 MC3 Relay Drives the relay rollers 8 PCBs PCB1 Tray Main Controls the paper tray unit and communicates with the copier printer 22 Others H1 Optional Tray Heater Removes humidity from the paper in the trays 17 ...

Page 719: ... 13 D331 Paper Tray Unit PB3030 D331 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Paper feed motor 2 Drive belt 3 Upper paper feed clutch 4 Relay clutch 5 Lower paper feed clutch 6 Upper paper feed roller 7 Relay roller 8 Lower paper feed roller ...

Page 720: ...RATION MECHANISM The paper tray holds 500 sheets The paper feed roller A drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier printer The friction pad B allows only one sheet to feed at a time The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring C ...

Page 721: ... plate pressure lever The lift motor turns on and turns clockwise as viewed on the diagram The main pressure spring H pulls the bottom plate pressure lever and this lifts the tray bottom plate When the top of the stack touches the feed roller the motor cannot pull up the plate any more so it pulls the actuator G into the lift sensor F The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high so...

Page 722: ...ift Mechanism D331 16 SM the bottom plate drops To make it easier to push the tray in the lift motor rotates backwards 1 7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling D to the original position ...

Page 723: ...tack raises the paper end feeler A and the paper end sensor B is deactivated When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up ...

Page 724: ...f sensor signals is sent to the copier printer Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Near End OFF ON 30 ON ON 70 ON OFF 100 OFF OFF When the tray contains paper of a small width the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper rem...

Page 725: ...nce C is adjusted for the installed paper To determine which size has been installed the CPU reads which paper size sensors the actuator has switched off Refer to the size detection lists as shown below EU AISA Size SN1 SN2 SN3 SP Setting A6 SEF 148 x 105 OFF ON OFF A5 LEF B5 LEF 182 x 257 ON OFF ON B6 SEF Exe LEF A4 LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF LT LEF A5 SEF HLT SEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON LT SEF ...

Page 726: ...LT LEF 210 x 297 ON ON OFF A4 LEF A5 SEF HLT SEF B5 SEF 257 x 182 OFF OFF ON LT SEF 279 x 216 OFF OFF OFF A4 SEF 297 x 210 ON OFF OFF LG SEF 364 x 257 ON ON ON DLT SEF 420 x 297 OFF ON ON A3 SEF The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected If the paper size actuator is broken or if there is no tray installed the Add Paper indicator will light ...

Page 727: ...ion to be incorrect To correct this each side fence has a stopper A attached to it Each side fence can be secured with a screw B for customers who do not want to change the paper size 2 7 2 END FENCE As the amount of paper in the tray decreases the bottom plate C lifts up gradually The end fence D is connected to the bottom plate When the tray bottom plate rises the end fence moves forward and pus...

Page 728: ......

Page 729: ...FAX OPTION TYPE 3350 D361 ...

Page 730: ......

Page 731: ...FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 32 3 3 IP FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 37 3 3 1 IP FAX TRANSMISSION 37 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION 40 4 SERVICE TABLE 44 4 1 CAUTIONS 44 4 2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES 45 4 2 1 SP1 XXX BIT SWITCHES 45 4 2 2 SP2 XXX RAM DATA 46 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 47 4 2 4 SP4 XXX ROM VERSIONS 50 4 2 5 SP5 XXX INITIALIZING 50 4 2 6 SP6 XXX REPORTS 51 4 2 7 SP7 XXX TEST MODES 54 4 2 8 SP9 XXX DESIGN SW...

Page 732: ...ILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 166 5 1 OVERVIEW 166 5 2 BOARDS 167 5 2 1 FCU 167 5 2 2 MBU 168 5 2 3 SG3 BOARD 168 5 3 VIDEO DATA PATH 170 5 3 1 TRANSMISSION 170 5 3 2 RECEPTION 172 5 4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 173 5 4 1 MULTI PORT 173 5 4 2 DOCUMENT SERVER 173 5 4 3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 174 5 5 IP FAX 184 5 5 1 WHAT IS IP FAX 184 5 5 2 T 38 PACKET FORMAT 184 5 5 3 SETTINGS 184 6 SPECIFICATION...

Page 733: ...one or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord The fax unit contains a lithium battery The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard batteries in accordance with th...

Page 734: ...tion and prevent minor injuries Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is added for emphasis This document provides tips and advice about how to be...

Page 735: ...antity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Qty 1 Handset Bracket NA only 1 2 Serial Number Label 1 3 FCC Label NA only 1 4 G3 Decal 1 Fax Keytops 2 5 Copy Keytpos 2 6 Fax Unit 1 7 Data Display Overlay for operation panel 2 8 Telephone Cable NA only 1 9 Screw M3x6 3 10 Ferrite Core NA Only 1 ...

Page 736: ... A Application plastic cover x1 B Left cover plate x1 C Knockouts LINE 1 for Fax Unit If one G3 Unit will be installed remove the knockout for LINE 1 and LINE 2 If two G3 Units will be installed remove the knockouts for both LINE 1 LINE 2 and LINE 3 ...

Page 737: ...e 32 MB Memory option will be installed do this now 32 MB Memory Option 6 If one or two G3 interface units options will be installed do this now G3 Interface Unit D361 7 Slide the fax unit B into the machine and fasten it x3 8 Reattach the plastic application cover x1 9 Attach the Serial number label and FCC decal NA only to under the serial number decal in rear cover of the main body 10 For NA mo...

Page 738: ...e sure that the plug is grounded properly at the power source 16 Switch the machine on If you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM cycle the machine off on to clear the message 17 Check the clock settings date and time with the User Tools 1 1 2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT D361 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the follo...

Page 739: ...one Cable NA 1 2 Screws M3 x 6 6 3 FFC Flat Flexible Cable 1 4 G3 Board 1 5 CCUIF 1 6 FCC Label NA only 1 G3 Interface Installation 1 If the fax unit is already installed in the machine remove Application plastic cover x1 xref FCU x3 2 Separate the FCU A from its cover B x3 x1 ...

Page 740: ...e connector Fasten the connected G3 CCUIF to the cover C G3 x2 CCUIF x4 2 Connect the FCU D and CCUIF B FFC x1 3 Reconnect the speaker harness E x1 Two G3 Units 1 Connect the G3 interface units A and B to the CCUIF C edge connector Fasten the connected G3 CCUIF to the cover D G3 x2 ea ...

Page 741: ...turn the main switch on 6 Enter the Fax SP mode and set Bit 1 of Communication Switch 16 to 1 if you install the single port or Enter the Fax SP mode and set Bit 3 of Communication Switch 16 to 1 if you install the dual ports 7 Print the system parameter list Make sure that G3 2 single port and G3 3 dual port are listed as an option 8 Set up and program the item required for PSTN 2 communication 1...

Page 742: ... 1 1 4 HANDSET B433 The optional handset is available for the U S version only 1 Remove the scanner left cover A x 2 2 Make two holes B in the scanner left cover Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver ...

Page 743: ...nner left cover on the machine x 2 4 Install the handset bracket C x 2 on the scanner left cover 5 Attach the clamp to the location D 6 Set the handset on the handset bracket 7 Clamp the handset cord 8 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine ...

Page 744: ...move the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board 2 Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time Do not turn off the battery switch SW1 Do SP6101 to print the system parameters Then check the settings ...

Page 745: ...ther end may be incompatible Replace the NCU or FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem traini...

Page 746: ...ther terminal did not reply to DCS Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the NCU or FCU The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 0 07 No post message response from the other end after a page was sent Check the line conn...

Page 747: ...lems and noise Cross reference Tx level NCU Parameter 01 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated Tx parameters Section 4 0 14 Non standard post message response code received Check the FCU NCU connectors Incompatible or defective remote terminal try sending to another machine Noisy line resend Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the NCU or FCU Cross referenc...

Page 748: ...the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Replace the NCU or FCU Check for line problems Try calling another fax machine Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and or rx cable equalizer setting Cross reference Reconstruction time G3 Switch 0A bit 6 Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 0 21 EOL signal end of line from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EO...

Page 749: ... Too many errors during reception Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Replace the NCU or FCU Defective remote terminal Check for line noise or other line problems Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and or rx error criteria Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Rx error criteria Communication Switch 02 bit...

Page 750: ...was not available V 8 calling and called terminal The other terminal did not have a compatible communication mode e g the other terminal was a V 34 data modem and not a fax modem A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal 0 74 The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI The calling...

Page 751: ... 0 79 The called terminal detected CI while waiting for a V 21 signal Check for line noise or other line problems If this error occurs the called terminal falls back to T 30 mode 0 80 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V 34 phase 2 line probing 0 81 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V 34 phase 3 equalizer training 0 82 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V 34 p...

Page 752: ...34 control channel restart The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn it back on If the same error is frequent replace the FCU 0 86 The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate The other terminal was incompatible Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer 0 87 The contr...

Page 753: ...ack on Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is frequent 2 24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine then turn it back on Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is frequent 2 25 JBIG data reconstruction error BIH error 2 26 JBIG data reconstruction error Float marker error 2 27 JBIG data reconstruction error End marker error 2 28 JBIG data reconstruction error Timeout JBIG data error Check the sender...

Page 754: ...or the NCU 4 10 Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch Closed Network or Tel No CSI mismatch Protection against Wrong Connections Get the ID Codes the same and or the CSIs programmed correctly then resend The machine at the other end may be defective 5 10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU 5 20 Storage impossible because of a lack of memory 5 21 Memory overflow Temporary memory shortag...

Page 755: ... G3 ECM facsimile data frame not received within 18 s of CFR but there was no line fail Check the line connection Check connections from the NCU to the FCU Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal Replace the FCU or NCU Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error Defective FCU The other terminal may be defecti...

Page 756: ...ctive remote terminal 6 99 V 21 signal not stopped within 6 s Replace the FCU 13 17 SIP user name registration error Double registration of the SIP user name Capacity for user name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient 13 18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server Defective SIP server 14 00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server Occ...

Page 757: ... with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct Folder send destination is incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct Device settings incorrect Confirm that the user name and password settings are correct Direct SMTP destination incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine if there...

Page 758: ...oes not exist on the SMTP server The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP sending 14 07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed 4XX Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed PC not operating correctly SMTP server operating incorrectly Network not operating correctly Destination folder setting incorrect Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly 14 08 Data Send to SMTP...

Page 759: ... file because The number of files created with other applications on the Document Server has exceeded the limit HDD is full or not operating correctly Software error 14 31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transmission HDD full or not operating correctly Software error 14 32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Dete...

Page 760: ...he job was created 14 60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the send operation 14 61 Notification Mail Send Failed for All Destinations All addresses for return notification mail failed 15 01 POP3 IMAP4 Server Not Registered At startup the system detected that the IP address of the POP3 IMAP4 server has not been registered in the machine 15 02 POP3 IMAP4 Mail Acco...

Page 761: ...d or Scan to Email 15 14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format For example the Date line description is incorrect 15 15 Mail Divide Error The e mail is not in standard format There is no boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large 15 17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual r...

Page 762: ...er The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of 30 15 61 Attachment File Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format 15 62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supported Page size error The page size was larger than A3 Compression error ...

Page 763: ...rmware 15 80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 15 81 Repeated Destination Registration Error Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination co...

Page 764: ...e the original into more than one page Check the resolution used for scanning Lower the scan resolution if possible Add optional page memory 22 01 Memory overflow while receiving Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to another fax machine if the machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory ca...

Page 765: ... machine Replace the FCU 25 00 The machine software resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred Update the ROM Replace the FCU F0 xx V 34 modem error Replace the FCU F6 xx SG3 V34 modem error Update the SG3 V34 modem ROM Replace the SG3 V34 board Check for line noise or other line problems Try communicating another V 8 V 34 fax ...

Page 766: ...the LAN Check that the LAN cable is connected to the machine Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit General LAN 2 LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the LAN can communicate through the LAN Between IFAX and PC 1 Network settings on the PC Check the network settings on the PC Is the IP address registered in the TCP IP properties in the network setup correct Check the IP address with ...

Page 767: ...t with other PCs Use the Network function in the User Tools If there is an IP address conflict inform the administrator 1 LAN settings in the machine Check the LAN parameters Check if there is an IP address conflict with other PCs Use the Network function in the User Tools If there is an IP address conflict inform the administrator Between machine and e mail server 2 E mail account on the server M...

Page 768: ...r to check Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully Between e mail server and internet 1 E mail account on the Server Make sure that the PC can log into the e mail server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to c...

Page 769: ...achine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully 3 Destination e mail address Make sure that the e mail address is actually used Check that the e mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces 4 Router settings Use the ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can s...

Page 770: ...em Action Remarks 5 Error message by e mail from the network of the destination Check whether e mail can be sent to another address on the same network using the application e mail software Check the error e mail message Inform the administrator of the LAN ...

Page 771: ...nual sending not supported 5 IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a...

Page 772: ...4 VoIP Gateway power switched on Contact the network administrator 5 Is the IP address host name of the specified Gateway correct Check the IP address host name 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9 IP address o...

Page 773: ...able connection 2 Number of specified Alias fax correct Confirm the Alias of the remote fax Error Code 13 14 3 Firewall NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 4 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 5 Gatekeeper installed correctly Contact the network administrator 6 Gatekeeper power switched on Contact the network administrator 7 I...

Page 774: ...ministrator to increase the bandwidth Raise the delay level IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 15 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the modem transmission baud rate IPFAX SW 05 16 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION Cannot receive by IP Address Host name Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firew...

Page 775: ...led transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly Contact the network administrator 4 VoIP Gateway power switche...

Page 776: ...t the network administrator Note The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model 4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on Contact the network administrator Note The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model 5 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct on the sender s side Request the sender to check the IP address host name Note The sender m...

Page 777: ...dress 9 Local fax Alias number registered Register the Alias number Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth 10 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX SW06 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator N...

Page 778: ...ess the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data ...

Page 779: ...it switches for internet fax settings for the fax option See section 4 2 Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option See section 4 2 Bit Switches Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Changes the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option See section 4 2 Bit Switches G3 1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit sw...

Page 780: ... Switch 108 001 032 00 1F Not used Do not change the bit switches G4 Parameter Switch 109 001 016 00 0F Not used Do not change the bit switches IP fax Switch 111 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters See section 4 2 Bit Switches 4 2 2 SP2 XXX RAM DATA 2 Mode No Function RAM Read Write 101 001 Changes RAM data for the fax board directly See section 4 5 Service RAM Ad...

Page 781: ...ettings for the standard G3 board See section 4 3 NCU Parameters G3 2 NCU Parameters 104 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board See section 4 3 NCU Parameters G3 3 NCU Parameters 105 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board See section 4 3 NCU Parameters 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 3 Mode No Function Service Station 001 Fax Number Enter the f...

Page 782: ...Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3 2 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 2 line 003 Memory Lock Disabled If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line change this SP to on 104 004 Transmission Disabled If you turn this S...

Page 783: ...change this SP to on 004 Transmission Disabled If you turn this SP on the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3 3 line ISDN Port Settings 001 Select Line 002 PSTN Access Number 106 003 Memory Lock Disabled 106 004 Transmission Disabled Not used Do not change the bit switches IPFAX Port Settings 001 H323 Port 002 SIP Port 003 RAS Port 004 Gatekeeper port 005 T 38 Port 006 SIP Server Port...

Page 784: ... ROM Version Displays the G3 2 modem version 105 001 G3 3 ROM Version Displays the G3 3 modem version 106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches 107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches 4 2 5 SP5 XXX INITIALIZING 5 Mode No Function Initialize SRAM 101 000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM files in the SAF memory and...

Page 785: ...s Initialize Security Bit Switches 106 000 Initializes only the security bit switches If you select automatic output display for the user parameter switches the security settings are initialized 4 2 6 SP6 XXX REPORTS 6 Mode No Function System Parameter List 101 000 Touch the ON button to print the system parameter list Service Monitor Report 102 000 Touch the ON button to print the service monitor...

Page 786: ... G3 2 line 006 G3 3 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 3 line 103 007 G3 3 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3 3 line G4 Protocol Dump List 001 Dch Bch 1 002 Dch 003 Bch 1 Link Layer 004 Dch Link Layer 005 Dch Bch 2 104 006 Bch 2 Link Layer Not used Do not change the bit switches All Files print out 105 0...

Page 787: ...ist Print out 001 All log files 002 Printer 003 SC TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 Fax Driver 010 G3CCU 011 Fax Job 012 CCU 107 013 Scanner Condition These log print out functions are for designer use only IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line 108 002 1 Communication...

Page 788: ... 1 V34 S2400baud 105 G3 1 V34 S2800baud 106 G3 1 V34 S3000baud 107 G3 1 V34 S3200baud 108 G3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test 110 G3 2 Modem Tests 111 G3 2 DTMF Tests 112 G3 2 V34 S2400baud 113 G3 2 V34 S2800baud 114 G3 2 V34 S3000baud 115 G3 2 V34 S3200baud 116 G3 2 V34 S3429baud 117 G3 3 Modem Tests 118 G3 3 DTMF Tests 119 G3 3 V34 S2400baud 120 G3 3 V34 S2800baud ...

Page 789: ...d 127 IG3 1 V34 S2800baud Not used 128 IG3 1 V34 S3000baud Not used 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud Not used 130 IG3 1 V34 S3429baud Not used 131 IG3 2 Modem Tests Not used 132 IG3 2 DTMF Tests Not used 133 IG3 2 V34 S2400baud Not used 134 IG3 2 V34 S2800baud Not used 135 IG3 2 V34 S3000baud Not used 136 IG3 2 V34 S3200baud Not used 137 IG3 2 V34 S3429baud Not used 4 2 8 SP9 XXX DESIGN SWITCH MODE 9 Mode ...

Page 790: ... manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine 4 3 1 SYSTEM SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No 1 101 001 No Function Comments 0 Dedicated transmission parameter programming 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters 1 Not used Do not change 2 Technical data prin...

Page 791: ...h numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and ECM reception records Rx level calculation Example The four digit hexadecimal value N after L indicates the rx level The high byte is given first followed by the low byte Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level In the above example the decimal value of N 0100 H is 256 So the actual rx level is 256 16 16 dB 3 Not used Do not cha...

Page 792: ...was an error during the communication 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Communication Parameters Modem rate 336 33600 bps 168 16800 bps 312 31200 bps 144 14400 bps 288 28800 bps 120 12000 bps 264 26400 bps 96 9600 bps 240 24000 bps 72 7200 bps 216 21600 bps 48 4800 bps 192 19200 bps 24 2400 bps Resolution S Standard 8 x 3 85 dots mm D Detail 8 x 7 7 dots mm F Fine 8 x 15 4 dots mm SF Superfi...

Page 793: ...factory settings System Switch 02 SP No 1 101 003 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change these settings 2 Forced reset after transmission stalls 0 Off 1 On With this setting on the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 File retention time 0 Depends on User Parameter 24 18 H 1 No limit 1 A file tha...

Page 794: ... SP No 1 101 004 No Function Comments 0 to 7 Length of time that RDS is temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable 00 99 hours BCD This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable The default setting is 24 hours System Switch 04 SP No 1 101 005 No Function Comments 0 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 Pri...

Page 795: ...ntial transmissions on the transmission result report 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If this feature is enabled the top half of the first page of confidential messages will be printed on transmission result reports 1 Inclusion of communications on the Journal when no image data was exchanged 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Communications that reached phase C message tx rx of the T 30 protocol are listed on the Journ...

Page 796: ...wish to print a protocol dump list only for communications with errors 7 Priority given to various types of remote terminal ID when printing reports 0 RTI CSI Dial label Tel number 1 Dial label Tel number RTI CSI This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses when listing remote terminal names on reports Dial Label The name stored by the user for the Quick Speed Dial number System Sw...

Page 797: ...en the handset is off hook 5 On hook dial 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 On hook dial is disabled 6 7 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0B Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0C Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0D Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0E SP No 1 101 015 No Function Comments 0 1 Not used Do not chang...

Page 798: ...tion the display remains the same 0 Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset is off hook However memory tx is not possible 1 The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings ...

Page 799: ... 07 Finland 18 Singapore 08 Ireland 19 Malaysia 09 Norway 1A China 0A Sweden 1B Taiwan 0B Switz 1C Korea 0C Portugal 20 Turkey 0D Holland 21 Greece 0E Spain 22 Hungary 0F Israel 23 Czech This country area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses However it has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM addresses Cross reference NCU country...

Page 800: ...he TTI overprints information that the customer considers to be important G3 transmissions 1 TSI G3 printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this bit to 1 if the TSI G3 overprints information that the customer considers to be important 2 Not used Do not change the factory settings 3 TTI used for broadcasting 0 The TTIs selected for each Quick ...

Page 801: ...em Switch 14 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 15 SP No 1 101 022 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Going into the Energy Saver mode automatically 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly because the 5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode 2 3 Not used Do not change these settings Interval for pr...

Page 802: ...N 1 This function allows the user to select the default G3 line type The optional SG3 units are required to use the PSTN 2 or 3 setting 2 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 17 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 18 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 19 SP No 1 101 026 No Function Comments 0 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Extended scanner...

Page 803: ...hoto and Photo modes System Switch 1A SP No 1 101 027 No Function Comments 0 to 7 LS RX memory capacity threshold setting 00 FF 0 1020 Kbyte Hex Sets the value to x4KB When the amount of available memory drops below this setting RX documents are printed to conserve memory Initial setting 0x80 512 KB System Switch 1B Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1C Not used do not change thes...

Page 804: ...ted the next transmission cannot be received This prevents overwriting communication records before the machine can print them 1 If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal is full fax communications are still possible But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine canno...

Page 805: ...ception is disabled 1 Faxes can be received if the sender has an RTI or CSI If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI and to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI change this bit to...

Page 806: ...e complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory 4 6 Not used Do not change the factory settings 7 Action when a fax SC has occurred 0 Automatic reset 1 Fax unit stops 0 When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207 the fax unit automatically resets itself 1 When the fax unit detects any fax SC code the fax unit stops Cross Reference Fax SC codes See...

Page 807: ... as the RX machine s original width setting and the original is reduced to this size before sending The default is A4 If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept the machine detects this and this causes an error I fax Switch 01 SP No 1 102 002 No Function Comments Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File These settings set the maximum resolution of ...

Page 808: ...ermine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Off 0 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned in mm are sent in mm Images received in inches are transmitted in inches Images received in mm are transmitted in mm When this switch is On 1 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned i...

Page 809: ...ceived a TIFF F file for example this setting is ignored and no header is printed Output from Attached Document at E mail TX Error 1 This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e mail attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wr...

Page 810: ...ded in the Subject string 10 Reserved 11 Reserved A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to 00 for dispatched received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error If any setting other than displayed 01 causes a problem change the setting to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt Media accept feature 4 This setting adds or does not add the media accept...

Page 811: ...output at the transfer station when it is received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission This feature is the same as for G3 transfer transmissions 0 Received original not output at the transfer station 1 Received original output The original is printed after the transfer station has transferred it to the destinations so its output confirms that the original has been transferred ...

Page 812: ...sfer Request 3 This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked to ensure that the polling IDs match 0 Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs 1 Receives and transfers all messages even if the polling IDs do not match 4 7 Not Used I fax Switch 04 SP No 1 102 005 No Function Comments Subject for Delivery TX Memory Transfer 0 This sett...

Page 813: ...midt 4 function This switch does not apply for condition 3 when the RX system is set up for memory sending delivery by F code sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL to prevent problems when receiving transmissions 2 7 Not Used I fax Switch 05 SP No 1 102 006 No Function Comments Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients 0 Determines whether the e mail addresses of the destinations...

Page 814: ...r be received received mail is then stored on the mail server 00 FF 0 to 1024 KB HEX The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory I fax Switch 09 SP No 1 102 010 No Function Comments 0 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails due to errors 01 F 1 15 ...

Page 815: ...n 0 If a 2 page RX transmission is split is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page 1 If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages for example 2 is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page This helps the user to identify pages that have bee...

Page 816: ...printed date and time at the bottom of each received page 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 01 SP No 1 103 002 No Function Comments 0 2 Not used Do not change the settings Maximum print width used in the setup protocol Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting 0 0 Not used 0 1 A3 1 0 B4 3 4 1 1 A4 These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer switch 01 is 1 5 6 Not used Do not change the sett...

Page 817: ...tup protocol Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol NSF DIS A4 or 8 5 x 11 297 mm width B5 256 mm width A5 or 8 5 x 5 5 216 mm width No paper available Paper end 216 mm width Printer Switch 02 SP No 1 103 003 No Function Comments 0 1st paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 2nd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 The paper fee...

Page 818: ...inter Switch 03 SP No 1 103 004 No Function Comments 0 Length reduction of received data 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Incoming pages are printed without length reduction Page separation threshold Printer Switch 03 bits 4 to 7 1 Incoming page length is reduced when printing Maximum reducible length Printer Switches 04 bits 0 to 4 1 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 to 7 Page separation setting when...

Page 819: ... No Function Comments Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03 0 above Maximum reducible length Paper length N x 5mm N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm 0 to 4 For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper Maximum reducible length Paper length 0 75 x ...

Page 820: ... Switch 06 SP No 1 103 007 No Function Comments 0 Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled 0 Printing will not start 1 Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper based on the paper size selection priority tables Cross reference Just size printing on off User switch 05 bit 5 1 7 Not used Do not change the settings ...

Page 821: ...ations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 0A Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 0C Not used do not change the setting...

Page 822: ... to print a received fax message the machine does not print the message Substitute Reception is used After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette the machine automatically prints the fax message Printing the sample image on reports Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting 0 0 The upper half only 0 1 50 reduction sub scan only 1 0 Same size 3 4 1 1 Not used Same size means the sample image is printed at 100 even i...

Page 823: ...ter Switch 0F SP No 1 103 016 No Function Comments Smoothing feature Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Disabled 1 0 Enabled 0 1 1 1 Not used 0 0 0 1 Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently 2 Duplex printing 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex printing mode 3 Binding direction for Dupl...

Page 824: ...1 MH MR 1 0 MH MR MMR 2 3 1 1 MH MR MMR JBIG These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 JBIG compression method Reception 0 Only basic supported 1 Basic and optional both supported Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 6 ...

Page 825: ... 1 Not used Do not change the setting Wrong connection prevention method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 8 digit CSI 1 0 4 digit CSI 1 1 CSI RTI 2 3 0 1 The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message if the last 8 digits of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number This does not work when manually dialed 1 0 The same as above except that on...

Page 826: ...hange in the DIS NSF frames Communication Switch 02 SP No 1 104 003 No Function Comments If there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold the machine will send a negative response The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub scan resolution and are as follows 100 dpi 6 L 12 H 200 dpi 12 L 24 H 300 dpi 18 L 36 H 0 G3 Burst error threshold 0 Low 1 High 400 dpi...

Page 827: ...ves RTN or PIN This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is being used 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 03 SP No 1 104 004 No Function Comments 0 7 Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory transmission 00 FF Hex times This setting is not used if ECM is switched on Default setting 03 H Communication Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 828: ... operation as a Transfer Station 1 Use of Economy Transmission during a Transfer operation to the Next Transfer Stations 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Use of Label Insertion for the End Receivers in a Transfer operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This bit determines whether the machine uses the Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station 3 Conditions required for ...

Page 829: ...he number programmed in communication switch 0C 0 If there is no matching number programmed in the machine the machine rejects the transfer request 1 Even if there is no matching number programmed in the machine the machine accepts the transfer request The result report will be printed at the transfer terminal but will not be sent back to the requesting terminal 6 7 Not used Do not change the sett...

Page 830: ... settings Communication Switch 0D SP No 1 104 014 No Function Comments 0 7 The available memory threshold below which ringing detection and therefore reception into memory is disabled 00 to FF Hex unit 4 kbytes e g 06 H 24 kbytes One page is about 24 kbytes The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold the machine cannot rece...

Page 831: ...1 104 017 No Function Comments 0 7 Memory transmission Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FE Hex times Communication Switch 11 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 12 SP No 1 104 019 No Function Comments 0 7 Memory transmission Interval between dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FF Hex minutes Communication Switch 13 Not used do not change th...

Page 832: ...e machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set up protocol DIS NSF before transmission 1 5 Not used Do not change the factory settings Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit 0 0 mm 0 1 inch 1 0 mm and inch 6 7 1 1 Not used For the best performance do not change the factory settings The sett...

Page 833: ...s been installed 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 17 SP No 1 104 024 No Function Comments 0 SEP reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Polling transmission to another maker s machine using the SEP Selective Polling signal is disabled 1 SUB reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Confidential reception to another maker s machine using the SUB Sub address signal is disabled 2 PWD rece...

Page 834: ...rotocol On Off 0 On 1 Off If the PABX does not support V 8 V 34 protocol procedure set this bit to 1 to disable V 8 Example If 0 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No Function Comments 0 1 Extension access...

Page 835: ...1 No Function Comments Monitor speaker during communication tx and rx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 0 1 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 protocol 1 0 Used for testing The monitor speaker is on all through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits a...

Page 836: ...rbid CED AMsam output 0 Off 1 On Forbid output Do not change this setting Default 0 Off unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No Function Comments 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that se...

Page 837: ...he same DIS frame twice 1 Before sending DCS the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line 1 Not Used Do not change the settings 2 V 8 protocol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 V 8 V 34 communications will not be possible Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14 4 kbps or lower 3 ECM frame size 0 256 bytes 1 64 bytes Keep ...

Page 838: ...l fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received This bit is ignored if ECM is being used 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0 Off 1 On This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line applied to PSTN G3 ringing Do not change this setting 0 No detection Outside Japan 1 Detection Inside Japan onl...

Page 839: ...1 1 33 6 0 3 Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit 2 Initial modem type for 9 6 k or 7 2 kbps Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 ...

Page 840: ... 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 1 0 1 0 24 0 1 0 1 1 26 4 1 1 0 0 28 8 1 1 0 1 31 2 0 3 Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually ...

Page 841: ...5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 0 1 V 27ter 0 0 1 0 V 27ter V 29 0 0 1 1 V 27ter V 29 V 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 4 7 Other settings Not used G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 No Function Comments PSTN cable equalizer tx mode Internal Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 1 High Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of th...

Page 842: ... frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs Communication error with error codes such as 0 20 0 23 etc Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 4 PSTN cable equalizer V 8 V 17 rx mode External 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keep this...

Page 843: ...s lost when receiving during non ECM mode 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception 0 5 s 1 13 s This bit set the maximum interval between EOL end of line signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if error code 0 21 is frequent 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Reconstruction ti...

Page 844: ...used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0E SP No 1 105 015 No Function Comments Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3 second CNG interval High order bit 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N FF 2250 ms 0 7 Low order bit 00 0E 3000 3700ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N 0F 3700 ms G3 Switch 0F SP No 1 105 0...

Page 845: ...n optional G3 interface unit G3 3 switches are the same as for G3 2 switches G3 2 Switch 00 SP No 1 106 001 No Function Comments Monitor speaker during communication tx and rx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disable 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 0 1 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 protocol 1 0 Used ...

Page 846: ...t used Do not change the setting 6 Forbid CED AMsam output 0 Off 1 On Forbid output Do not change this setting Default 0 Off unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 2 Switch 02 SP No 1 106 003 No Function Comments 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can...

Page 847: ...6 004 No Function Comments 0 DIS detection number Echo countermeasure 0 1 1 2 0 The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice 1 Before sending DCS the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line 1 Not Used Do not change the settings 2 V 8 protocol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 V 8 V 34 communications will not be possible Do not set to 0 unless the line cond...

Page 848: ...tive code RTN or PIN 0 No change 1 Fallback 1 The machine s tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received This bit is ignored if ECM is being used 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0 Off 1 On This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line applied to PSTN G3 ringing Do not ...

Page 849: ...4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 1 0 1 0 24 0 1 0 1 1 26 4 1 1 0 0 28 8 1 1 0 1 31 2 0 3 Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be ...

Page 850: ...he settings G3 2 Switch 06 SP No 1 106 007 No Function Comments Initial Rx modem rate kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 0 3 1 0 1 0 24 0 These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14 4 kb...

Page 851: ...eception The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit 2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 0 1 V 27ter 0 0 1 0 V 27ter 0 0 1 1 V 27ter 0 1 0 0 V 27ter 0 1 0 1 V 27ter 4 7 Other settings Not used ...

Page 852: ... occurs Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High 2 3 Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Also try using the cable equalizer if on...

Page 853: ...0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 0 1 1 1 Not used These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time Try a longer setting if error code 0 22 is frequent 2 Select cancellation of high speed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving 0 Off 1 On This switch setting determines if high speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non ECM mode 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 M...

Page 854: ...s bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data Refer to error code 0 20 ITU T T 30 recommendation The first line should come within 5 s of CFR 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 855: ... gatekeeper for IP Fax 5 IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 0 LSB first 1 MSB first Reverses the T30 bit signal 6 IP Fax max bit rate setting 0 Not affected 1 Affected When 0 is selected the max bit rate does not affect the value of the DIS DCS When 1 is selected the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS DCS 7 IP Fax received telephone number confirmation 0 No confirmation 1 Confirmation When 0 is ...

Page 856: ...ues in this 4 bit binary switch combination Waiting time set value level x 100 ms Max 0f 1500 ms Min 00 No wait time The default is 0000 00H IP Fax Switch 02 SP No 1 111 003 No Function Comments 0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting 0 Maker code setting 1 Internal bit switch setting When 0 is selected the bit signal reverse method is decided by the maker code When 1 is selected the bit signal revers...

Page 857: ...standard function information 0 OFF 1 4byte DIS Limits the effective field for standard G3 function information 1 Switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard 0 Enable switching 1 G3 standard only Enables disables switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard 2 AI modem rate function 0 OFF 1 ON enable Enables disables the AI modem rate 3 ECM frame size selection at transmitting 0 256byte ...

Page 858: ...d 7 Not used Do not change this setting IP Fax Switch 04 SP No 1 111 005 No Function Comments 0 3 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level 00 to 0f The default is 1111 0fH 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 05 SP No 1 111 006 No Function Comments Modem bit rate setting for transmission kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 1 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 ...

Page 859: ...0 0 28 8 1 1 0 1 31 2 1 1 1 0 33 6 Modem setting for transmission Bit 5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 V29 0 1 V17 1 0 V34 4 5 1 1 Not used Sets the modem type for transmission The default is 00 V29 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 06 SP No 1 111 007 No Function Comments 0 3 Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps ...

Page 860: ...0 TSI information 0 Not added 1 Added Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS S 1 DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout 2 Not used Do not change this setting 3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled 0 No hang up 1 Hang up after transmitting DCN Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception 4 Number ...

Page 861: ...Fax Option Type 3350 D361 IP Fax Switch 07 SP No 1 111 008 No Function Comments no CSI registration 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted When 1 is selected the transmitted data is all spaces 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings ...

Page 862: ... 1 3 5 s 1 0 4 s 2 3 1 1 5 s Adjust the T4 timer The default is 00 3 seconds T0 timer adjustment Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 75 s 0 1 120 s 1 0 180 s 4 5 1 1 240 s Adjusts the fail safe timer This timer sets the interval between setup data transmission and T 38 phase decision If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late adjust the longer interval timer The default is 00 75 second...

Page 863: ... following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 e g 680700 for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit Address Function Unit Remarks Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this ad...

Page 864: ...501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 680...

Page 865: ...cted HIGH 20 ms 680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit high byte 680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper li...

Page 866: ...ontain FF H tone detection is disabled 680524 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected LOW 20 ms 680525 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected HIGH 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses co...

Page 867: ...r of cycles required for detection a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 75 0 1 50 1 0 25 1 1 12 5 680533 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0 Bits 7 6 5 4 number of cycles required for cadence detection 680534 International dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680535 International dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz...

Page 868: ...te 2 68053D International dial wait interval LOW 68053E International dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68053F Country dial tone upper frequency limit HIGH 680540 Country dial tone upper frequency limit LOW If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680541 Country dial tone lower frequency limit HIGH 680542 Country dial tone lower frequency limit LOW Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF ...

Page 869: ...Note 3 SP2 103 013 parameter 12 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 014 parameter 13 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 015 parameter 14 This parameter is only valid in Europe 68054E Minimum pause between dialed digits pulse dial mode See Note 3 and 8 SP2 103 016 parameter 15 68054F Time waited when a...

Page 870: ...lling N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 022 parameter 21 See Note 5 680555 ISDN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling dBm x 0 5 See Note 5 680556 Not used Do not change the settings 680557 Time between 68054Dh NCU parameter 14 and 68054Eh NCU parameter 15 1 ms This parameter takes effect when the country code is set to France 680558 Not used Do not change the setting 680559 Grounding time ground start ...

Page 871: ...n 7 in the UK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 1 35 0 0 1 0 30 0 1 0 0 40 0 68055E Progress tone detection level and cadence detection enable flags Bits 2 0 See Note 2 68055F to 680564 Not used Do not change the settings 680565 Long distance call prefix HIGH BCD 680566 Long distance call prefix LOW BCD For a code of 0 680565 FF 680566 FF 680567 to 680571 Not used Do not change the settings 680...

Page 872: ...0577 Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms See Note 4 SP2 103 008 parameter 07 680578 Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings 20 ms SP2 103 009 parameter 08 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time LOW SP2 103 010 parameter 09 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time HIGH 20 ms SP2 103 011 parameter 10 68057B to 680580 Not used Do not change the settings 680581 Int...

Page 873: ... CED detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms 2...

Page 874: ...actory setting 3000 ms 6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for detection The data is coded in the same way as address 680533 6805AE Not used Do not change the settings 6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection i...

Page 875: ...e 7 6805B7 PABX Tx level from the modem dBm 6805B8 PABX 1100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B8 dB 6805B9 PABX 2100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD Modem turn on level incoming signal detection level 37 0 5N dBm 6805BE to 6805C6 Not used Do not change the settings 6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 V 34 protocol dump 0 Simple 1 Detailed default Bits 5 to 7 Not...

Page 876: ...ernally connected line Do not change these settings Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2 75 V 0 0 1 0 5 5 V 1 0 0 0 22 V 6805E3 1 1 1 1 41 25 V 0 RT 0 Low Bit 1 1 RT 1 High 0 RZ 0 High 6805E4 Bit 1 sets the level of the call signal Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance Bit 3 1 RZ 1 Composite 0 RT 0 Low Bit 0 1 RT 1 High 0 Use RDTP 6805E5 Bit 0 sets the ring detection method Bit 1 sets...

Page 877: ...ons of the following RAM addresses are changed 680508 if bit 0 1 or 680538 if bit 2 1 tolerance for on or off state duration and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit 0 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit 0 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit 20 ms 3 Pulse dial parameters addresses 68054A to 68054F are the values for...

Page 878: ...8054D Europe Between Ds closing and Di closing France Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM a...

Page 879: ...ok Management mode User Tools System Settings Key Operator Address Book Management 3 Select the address book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 5 The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 6 To scroll throug...

Page 880: ... If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting adjust this byte The T1 time is the value stored in this byte in hex code multiplied by 1 second Range 0 to 120 s 00h to 78h FFh The local NCU parameter factory setting is used Do not program a value between 79h and FEh ...

Page 881: ... the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Do not use settings other than listed on the left Cable equalizer Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 Low 0 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 High 5 to 7 1 1 1 Disabled Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between...

Page 882: ...Tx modem rate kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 0 to 3 1 0 0 1 21 6 If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long the initial modem rate may be too high Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits For the settings 14 4 or kbps slower Switch 04 bit 4 must be ch...

Page 883: ...etting 0 0 Inch mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled 0 1 The machine uses inch based resolutions for scanning If inch only is selected the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm based resolutions If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used DIS NSF detection method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 2 3 0 0 First DIS or NSF 0 1 Use ...

Page 884: ...possible If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 5 Compression modes available in transmit mode 0 MH only 1 Disabled This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other terminal during transmission If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used ECM during transmission Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Off 0 1 On 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled 6 7 For example if ECM is...

Page 885: ... Function Comments 0 HM Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches HM compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 1 HR Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches HR compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 2 MMR Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to ...

Page 886: ...f the e mail attachment as B4 2 Original width of e mail attachment A3 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A3 3 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 above The 1 selection ignores the sele...

Page 887: ... these settings 4 Line resolution of e mail attachment 400 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 5 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 04 above The 1 selection ignores the...

Page 888: ...Dedicated Transmission Parameters D361 154 SM Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 889: ...s 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies this switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2 Reception time printing this switch is not printed...

Page 890: ... sender s name on reports 0 Off 1 On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 Bit 1 Setting 0 0 The mach...

Page 891: ...er parameter switch 09 SWUSR_09 Not used 6800DA H User parameter switch 10 SWUSR_0A Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 2 into 1 0 Off 1 On Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Page reduction 0 Off 1 On Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Reception file printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 6 Use both e mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bi...

Page 892: ...t Bits 0 1 and 2 Cassette for fax printout Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 1 1st paper feed station 0 1 0 2nd paper feed station 0 1 1 3rd paper feed station 1 0 0 4th paper feed station 1 0 1 LCT Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 5 Using the cassette specified by bits 0 1 and 2 above only 0 On 1 Off Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E0 H User parameter switch 16 SWUSR_10 This switch is not ...

Page 893: ...cted for broadcasting 0 Not needed 1 Needed Bits 3 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone 0 Displays Cannot detect original size 1 Receives fax messages 6800E2 H User parameter switch 18 SWUSR_12 Bit 0 TTI date 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 TTI sender 0 Off 1 On Bit 2 TTI file number 0 Off 1 On Bit 3 TTI page number 0 Off 1 On Bit 4 to 7 No...

Page 894: ... size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting minutes 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 and so on unti...

Page 895: ...nabled Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E7 H User parameter switch 23 SWUSR_17 Not used 6800E8 H User parameter switch 24 SWUSR_18 Bits 0 and 1 File retention time Cross reference System switch 02 bit 4 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 File retention impossible 0 1 24 hours 1 0 File retention impossible 1 1 72 hours Bits 2 to 7 Not used 6800E9 H User parameter switch 25 SWUSR_19 Bit 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used...

Page 896: ...mber SP3 101 6801B0 to 6801B9 H Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3 H Own fax number PSTN 6801C4 to 6801D7 H Own fax number ISDN G4 Not used 6801D8 to 6801E3 H The first subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801E4 to 6801EF H The second subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801F0 to 6801FB H The first subscriber number ISDN G4 Not used 6801FC to 680207 H The second subscriber number ISDN G4...

Page 897: ...ond 680387 H 00 Monday 01 Tuesday 02 Wednesday and so on until 06 Sunday 680394 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bit 0 Page Memory 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 1 SAF Memory 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bits 2 to 7 Not used 680395 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 G3 2 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 5 G3 3 0 Not installe...

Page 898: ...rver Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EE84 H Redirect server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF04 H Registrar server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF84 H Registrar server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69F004 H Gatekeeper server address Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69F084 H Gatekeeper server address Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69F104 H Alias Number Max 128 characters ASCII 69F184 H SIP user name M...

Page 899: ... 6BEC01 H Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit Low Defaults NA 60 EU 90 ASIA 90 6BEC02 H Dial tone detection waiting time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 64 ASIA 64 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time 20 ms Defaults Area 6BEC03 6BEC04 NA F4 01 EU F4 01 ASIA F4 01 6BEC05 H Dial tone detect judge time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 1B ASIA 32 6BEC06 H Dial tone disconnect permission time 20 m...

Page 900: ...contains the ROM and SRAM Also the FCU has an NCU circuit Fax Options Extra G3 Interface option This provides one more analog line interface This allows full dual access Two extra G3 interface options can be installed Memory Expansion This expands the SAF memory and the page memory used for image rotation without this expansion the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi so tra...

Page 901: ...E3 Fax Application Control Engine CPU Data compression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem FAME V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows SAF memory 4MB Working memory 4MB Page memory 8MB The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery Memory Back up A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory DRAM for 1 ho...

Page 902: ...e MBU board ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB 16bit x 1MB 1MB 16bit x 512K SRAM The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery Memory Back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base copier s main switch is turned off Switches Item Description SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on ...

Page 903: ...on Control Processor Controls the SG3 board CPU RU30 DPRAM Dual Port RAM Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block DMA controller JBIG DSP V34 modem RL5T892 Includes the DTMF Receiver function DCR for MH MR MMR and JBIG compression and decompression FROM 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage SDRAM 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer line buffer and workin...

Page 904: ...F independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU converts the data to mm format and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory If image rotation will be done the image is rotated in page memory before compression At the time of transmission the FCU decompresses the stored...

Page 905: ...mits the data to the line JBIG Transmission Memory transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the DCR to the QM Coder Then the NCU transmits the data to the line When an optional G3 unit SG3 is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type JBIG compression is available but only for the PSTN 2 line Immediate transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goe...

Page 906: ... the IPU If the optional G3 unit is installed the line that the message comes in on depends on the telephone number dialled by the other party the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the QM CODER for decompression Then the data is stored in the page me...

Page 907: ...es at once Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations Standard only PSTN G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit single PSTN PSTN G3 G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit double PSTN PSTN PSTN G3 G3 G3 5 4 2 DOCUMENT SERVER The base copier s scanner scans the original at the selected resolution The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board Then the controller stores the data in...

Page 908: ...ent is compressed with MMR and stored Up to 9 000 pages can be stored 1 file Up to 1 000 pages from the fax application Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted Scanned documents are given a name automatically such as FAX001 But it is possible to change the file name user name and password Up to 30 files can be selected at once The compression method of the fax application...

Page 909: ...ss of the sender Reply To Destination requested for reply To Mail address of the destination Bcc Backup mail address Subject From CSI or RTI Fax Message No xxxx Content Type Multipart mixed Attached files image tiff Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Message Body MIME converted TIFF F MIME standards specify how files are attached to e mail messages Direct SMTP Transmiss...

Page 910: ...tion Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication User Tools System Settings File Transfer SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP User Tools System Settings File Transfer POP Before SMTP Mail Reception Three Types This machine supports three types of e mail reception POP3 Post Office Protocol Ver 3 IMAP4 Internet Messaging Access Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol For details Core Techno...

Page 911: ...r delivery then the machine responds with an error User Tools Facsimile Features E mail Settings SMTP RX File Delivery Settings 4 If the quick dial speed dial or group dial entry is incorrect the mail transmission is lost and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report Auth E mail RX In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX the addresses of senders must be li...

Page 912: ... message rfc822 Image tiff Charset US ASCII ISO 8859 X Other types cannot be handled and some garbage may appear in the data Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable 2 MIME decoding errors 3 File format not recognized as TIFF F format 4 Resolution document size or compression type cannot be accepted Remaining SAF capacity error The machine calls the server but does not receiv...

Page 913: ...t part image tiff for attached files Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 Bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Mail body text part RELAY ID xxxx xxxx 4 digits for an ID code RELAY 01 X 01 Message body MIME converted TIFF F E Mail Options Sub TX Mode The following features are available as options for mail sending entering a subject designating the level of importance confirming reception of the mail Subject ...

Page 914: ... 2 and 3 3 CSI RTI not registered Confirmation of Reception From 4 None CSI RTI not registered Error Return Receipt processed error RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery Mail delivery RTI or CSI of sender Mail sending from G3 memory Mail address of sender Memory sending Mail delivery memory transfer SMTP receiving and delivery From Mail address of sender SMTP receiving and delivery Off...

Page 915: ...his confirmation is done in four steps 1 Send request for confirmation of mail reception To enable or disable this request known as MDN Sub TX Mode E mail Options 2 Mail reception receive confirmation request 3 Send confirmation of mail reception 4 Receive confirmation of mail reception The other party s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met The other part...

Page 916: ...st is replaced i e the journal is annotated with OK in the Result column When the return receipt reports an error the journal is annotated with an E in the Result column The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in the Result column If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing l...

Page 917: ...Fax Communication Features SM 183 D361 Fax Option Type 3350 D361 ...

Page 918: ... Bit 0 Level 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 1 1 3 Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network If TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 2 3 Redundant packets...

Page 919: ... 5 0 47 2 ins Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Double sided document Length 128 432 mm 5 0 17 inch Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD Resolution G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi Detail 400 x 400 dpi Super Fine Note Optional Expansion Memory required...

Page 920: ...33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback I O Rate With ECM 0 ms line Without ECM 2 5 5 10 20 or 40 ms line Memory Capacity ECM 128 KB SAF Standard 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory 28 MB 4 MB 24 MB Page Memory Standard 4 MB Print 2 MB Scanner 2 MB With optional Expansion Memory 12 MB 4 MB 8 MB Print 8 MB Scanner 4 MB ...

Page 921: ...Document 6 Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200 Specific Senders 30 The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory are installed Without the Expansion Memory With the Expansion Memory Memory Transmission files 400 400 Maximum number of pages for memory transmission 1000 10...

Page 922: ...peed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4 LT Note To use B4 and A3 width IFAX SW00 Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 A3 must be set to 1 E mail File Format Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH MR MMR Protocol Transmission SMTP TCP IP Reception POP3 SMTP IMAP4 TCP IP Data rate 100 Mbps 100base Tx 10 Mbps 10base T Au...

Page 923: ...equired Original size Maximum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to ...

Page 924: ...Code No Remarks FCU 6 MBU 7 Speaker D361 1 Included with fax unit CCU I F Board 3 G3 Board D361 4 Included with optional G3 unit G3 Board D361 5 Included with optional G3 unit Expansion Memory G578 2 Common with R C4 4 5 Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only Common with R C4 4 5 ...

Page 925: ...ARDF DF3030 D366 ...

Page 926: ......

Page 927: ...SORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 5 1 3 3 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR 6 1 3 4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR 6 1 3 5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 7 1 4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 8 1 4 1 FEED MOTOR 8 1 4 2 PICK UP SOLENOID 8 1 4 3 INVERTER SOLENOID 9 1 4 4 FEED CLUTCH 10 1 4 5 TRANSPORT MOTOR 11 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 12 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 2...

Page 928: ...D366 ii SM 2 2 4 SKEW CORRECTION 21 2 2 5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 22 2 2 6 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION 23 3 SERVICE TABLES 25 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 25 ...

Page 929: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 930: ......

Page 931: ...TRAY 1 1 1 REAR COVER 1 Open the left cover A 2 Open the original tray B 3 Rear cover C x 1 hook x 6 1 1 2 FRONT COVER AND ORIGINAL TRAY 1 Open the left cover 2 Rear cover Rear Cover 3 Front cover A x 1 Keep the original tray open when you remove the front cover 4 Original tray B x 1 x 1 ...

Page 932: ...nents D366 2 SM 1 2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS 1 2 1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit A 1 2 2 PICK UP ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit Original Feed Unit 3 Pick up roller A x 1 ...

Page 933: ... 1 2 3 FEED BELT 1 Open the left cover 2 Original feed unit Original Feed Unit 3 Feed belt cover A spring x 1 When reassembling the feed belt cover make sure that the projection B of the feed belt cover is on the guide plate rear C 4 Belt tension unit D ...

Page 934: ...Document Feed Components D366 4 SM 5 Feed belt E 1 2 4 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Open the left cover 2 Separation roller cover A 3 Separation roller B x 1 ...

Page 935: ...VE BOARD AND DF POSITION SENSOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 ARDF drive board A x 3 all s 3 DF position sensor with bracket B x 1 x 1 4 DF position sensor C hook x 2 1 3 2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 1 Original Tray see Front Cover and Original Tray 2 Tray cover A x 3 ...

Page 936: ...he Original Feed Unit 3 Original Tray see the Original Tray 4 Original feed in guide plate A x 3 5 Original set sensor bracket B x 1 6 Original set sensor C 1 3 4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR 1 Original feed in guide plate see Original Set Sensor 2 Original turn guide plate A hook x 1 3 Original width sensors B x 1 each and skew correction sensor C with bracket ...

Page 937: ...0 D366 x 1 x 1 1 3 5 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the ARDF 2 Remove the left edge of the platen sheet 3 Release the hook A 4 Open the original exit guide plate B 5 Stamp solenoid C x 1 x 1 6 Original exit sensor D x 1 hook x 1 ...

Page 938: ... D366 8 SM 1 4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 1 4 1 FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Feed motor with bracket A x 2 x 1 spring x 1 3 Feed motor B x 2 1 4 2 PICK UP SOLENOID 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide A all s ...

Page 939: ...eed Drive SM 9 D366 ARDF DF3030 D366 3 Pick up solenoid B x 2 x 1 1 4 3 INVERTER SOLENOID 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Inverter solenoid A x 2 x 1 x 1 gear x 1 gear cover x 1 ...

Page 940: ...Original Feed Drive D366 10 SM 1 4 4 FEED CLUTCH 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Bracket A x 2 x 3 x 1 bushing x 1 spring x 1 4 Slide the bracket 5 Feed clutch B x 1 ...

Page 941: ...D366 ARDF DF3030 D366 1 4 5 TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear cover see Rear Cover 2 Harness guide see Pick up Solenoid 3 Left cover sensor with bracket A x 1 x 1 4 Transport motor with bracket B x 2 x 1 spring x 1 5 Transport motor C x 2 ...

Page 942: ...Belt 3 Pick up Roller 4 Original Trailing Edge Sensor 5 Original Tray 6 Original Length Sensor 1 7 Original Length Sensor 2 8 Original Length Sensor 3 9 Inverter Roller 10 Junction Gate 11 Exit Roller 12 Original Exit Sensor 13 Transport Roller 14 Registration Roller 15 Registration Sensor 16 Skew Correction Roller 17 Skew Correction Sensor ...

Page 943: ...3030 D366 2 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT Sensors 1 Original Width Sensor 2 Skew Correction Sensor 3 Registration Sensor 4 Cover Sensor 5 Original Set Sensor 6 Exit Sensor 7 Original Sensor 8 Original Length Sensor 9 DF Position Sensor ...

Page 944: ...d belt separation pick up and reverse table rollers 5 M2 Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 1 Sensors S9 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not 9 S5 Skew Correction Detects the leading edge of the original to turn off the DF feed and transport motors 2 S8 Registration Detects the original exposure timing and checks for original misfeeds 3 S10 Cover Sensor Detects whether ...

Page 945: ...it Detects the leading edge of the original to turn on the junction gate solenoid and checks for original misfeeds Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn off the transport and feed motor and junction gate solenoid In single sided mode used to detect original misfeeds 6 S11 Original Detects the trailing edge of the last original to stop copy paper feed and to turn off the transport motor...

Page 946: ... drive signals from the copier 6 2 1 3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Feed Motor 2 Pick up Roller 3 Separation Roller 4 Feed Belt 5 Skew Correction Roller 6 Feed Clutch 7 Transport Motor 8 Exit Roller 9 Registration Roller Feed Motor Drives the feed belt separation pick up and skew correction rollers Transport Motor Drives the registration and exit rollers ...

Page 947: ...Sensor M H Width Sensor L I Width Sensor LL and three original length sensors C Length Sensor S D Length Sensor M E Length Sensor L Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors the machine can detect the size of the original This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table below Width Sensor Length Sensor Area Size S M L LL S M L LT A B A3 SEF 297 x 420 ON O...

Page 948: ...Paper present LT North America A B Europe Asia For O mark which has superscripted number it is possible to change the original detection size with SP6 016 For example instead of LT O3 the machine can be set up to detect 10 x 8 3 The F size can be selected with SP5 126 The default is 8 5 x 13 The machine cannot detect more than one size of original in the same job 2 2 2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE Thi...

Page 949: ...mined before the image is scanned Auto Reduce Enlarge Centering Erase Center Border Booklet Image Repeat The originals follow this path 1 Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table 2 Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table restores the original order 3 Inverter table Scanning glass image scanned Exit tray Normal feed in In a copy mode other than those listed above when the reduction enlar...

Page 950: ...d unit A moves down At the same time the pick up solenoid is activated and the original table lifts until the original comes in contact with the pick up roller B The pick up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper After being fed from feed belt C the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller D and sent to the skew correction roller The mechanism is an FRR system consistin...

Page 951: ...n the leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller skew in the original is removed A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor A the feed motor B turns off for 40 ms and rotates in reverse At this time the skew correction roller C and the feed belt both turn and original feed continues The original is fed by the skew correction roller aft...

Page 952: ...iginal exposure guide B and DF exposure glass C After scanning the original is fed out by the transport roller D and exit roller E Double Sided Originals After skew correction the feed and transport motors drive the skew correction roller A registration roller B transport roller C and the exit roller D The front side of the original is then scanned When the original exit sensor detects the leading...

Page 953: ...it tray G in the correct order Original Sensor During one to one copying copy paper is fed to the skew correction roller in advance while the original is still being scanned to increase the copy speed The original sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra...

Page 954: ...s on too long The exit sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its length x 1 5 after the exit sensor turned on The skew correction sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by transport path length x 1 5 The registration sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by transport path length x 1 5 after the skew correction sensor turned on Sensor does not come on...

Page 955: ...ee run No original Two sided mode 100 speed 0 1 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 32 speed 0 1 1 1 Free run With original One sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 70 speed 1 0 0 1 Free run With original One sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 0 Free run With original Two sided mode 200 speed 1 0 1 1 Transport Motor ...

Page 956: ......

Page 957: ...1 BIN TRAY BN3030 D367 ...

Page 958: ......

Page 959: ...ALL INFORMATION 1 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 4 2 1 BASIC OPERATION 4 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 5 3 1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL 5 ...

Page 960: ......

Page 961: ...ard Size A5 Lengthwise to A3 HLT Lengthwise to DLT Non standard Size Paper Width 90 297 mm Paper Length 148 432 mm Paper Weight 60 105 g m 16 28 lbs Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m 20 lbs Power Source 5 VDC 24 VDC from the copier Power Consumption 17 W Weight 1 1 kg Size W x D x H 530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm ...

Page 962: ...L COMPONENT LAYOUT D367 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Exit Rollers 2 Junction Gate Gear 3 Drive Gear 4 Paper Tray 5 Paper Sensor 6 Junction Gate Interchange Unit B413V500 WMF B413V501 WMF 1 2 3 1 6 5 4 ...

Page 963: ...nsor 2 1 bin Sorter Exit Tray LED located in the copier 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No Sensors S1 Paper Detects when there is paper on the tray 1 LEDs LED1 1 Bin Exit Tray Indicates when there is paper in the tray This sensor is located in the copier 2 B413V502 WMF 1 2 ...

Page 964: ...ch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray C The junction gate solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is directed to the tray The main motor in the copier stops after the final sheet passes through the paper sensor E The paper sensor E turns on when there is paper in the tray and the paper indicator F turns on The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging ...

Page 965: ...OR REMOVAL SM 5 D367 1 Bin Tray BN3030 D367 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL 1 Remove the 1 bin tray 2 Remove the 1 bin sorter unit A 3 Remove the paper sensor B 1 connector B413R101 WMF A B ...

Page 966: ......

Page 967: ...BRIDGE UNIT BU3020 D368 ...

Page 968: ......

Page 969: ...CHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 4 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 5 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 6 2 1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 6 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 7 3 1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT 7 3 2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 8 3 3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 8 ...

Page 970: ......

Page 971: ... SPECIFICATIONS Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb Power Source DC24 V 5 V from the copier printer Dimensions W x D x H 413 x 435 x 126 mm Weight 3 0 kg 6 6 lbs ...

Page 972: ...CHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Tray Exit Sensor 3 Junction Gate 4 Cooling Fan 5 1st Transport Roller 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 3rd Transport Roller 8 Left Exit Roller 9 Relay Sensor 10 Paper Tray B417V500 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 ...

Page 973: ...it BU3020 D368 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Left Guide Switch 2 Right Guide Switch 3 Junction Gate Solenoid 4 Tray Exit Sensor 5 Cooling Fan Motor 6 Relay Sensor 7 Bridge Unit Drive Motor 8 Bridge Unit Control Board B417V501 WMF 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 974: ...nit 7 Sensors S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds 4 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 6 Switches SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper to the upper tray on top of the bridge unit or to the finisher 3 PCBs PCB1 Bridge Unit Control Board Controls the bridge unit ...

Page 975: ...UT SM 5 D368 Bridge Unit BU3020 D368 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 1st Transport Roller 4 Upper Exit Roller 5 3rd Transport Roller 6 Bridge Unit Drive Motor B417V502 WMF 4 5 6 1 3 2 ...

Page 976: ...dge unit or to the finisher depending on which has been selected If the junction gate solenoid A has been activated the junction gate B points downward and directs the paper to the upper tray D dotted line path in illustration When the solenoid is off the junction gate points upward and the paper is fed out to the finisher C by the transport and exit rollers solid line B417D104 WMF A B C D ...

Page 977: ...ing apart the bridge unit first take the unit out of the copier 3 1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the bridge unit from the copier See the Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Remove the rear cover C 2 screws 3 Remove the bridge unit drive motor D 2 screws 1 connector B417R103 WMF D C ...

Page 978: ... 2 screws See Bridge Unit Drive Motor Replacement 3 Remove the paper tray A 4 Remove the exit guide B 2 screws 5 Remove the tray exit sensor C 1 connector 3 3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the bridge unit from the copier See the Installation Procedure in the base copier manual 2 Stand the bridge unit up as shown in the illustration and remove the sensor D B417R104 WMF B417R102 WMF A C B D ...

Page 979: ...DUPLEX UNIT AD3000 D369 ...

Page 980: ......

Page 981: ... COMPONENT 5 1 2 1 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 5 1 2 2 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 6 1 2 3 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 7 1 3 BY PASS UNIT 9 1 3 1 PAPER END SENSOR BYPASS 9 1 3 2 BY PASS FEED ROLLER 9 1 3 3 SEPARATION PAD 10 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 12 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 12 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT 12 2 1 2 DUPLEX DRIVE 13 2 2 OVERVIEW 14 2 2 1 INVERTER MECHANISM 14 2 2 2 DUPLEX OPERATION 15 ...

Page 982: ......

Page 983: ...eted 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with...

Page 984: ...ions and heat build up The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions CONVENTIONS AND TRADEMARKS CONVENTIONS Symbol What it means Core Tech Manual Screw Connector E ring C ring Clamp FFC Flexible Film Connector ...

Page 985: ... prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trade...

Page 986: ......

Page 987: ... AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 UNIT AND COVER 1 1 1 DUPLEX UNIT 1 Open the right door and right door of the optional paper tray unit or LCT 2 Connector cover A x 1 3 Disconnect the cable B 4 Release the rear link C x 1 5 Release the front link D and remove the duplex unit E ...

Page 988: ...Unit and Cover D369 2 SM 1 1 2 BY PASS TRAY 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 Inner rear cover A x 3 3 Paper guide unit B tabs x 4 ...

Page 989: ...Unit and Cover SM 3 D369 Duplex Unit AD3000 D369 4 Disconnect the by pass tray cable C x 1 5 Remove the front and rear pins D x 1 each ...

Page 990: ...Unit and Cover D369 4 SM 6 By pass tray E 1 1 3 RIGHT DOOR COVER 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 By pass tray By pass Tray 3 Right door cover x 4 ...

Page 991: ...Electrical Component SM 5 D369 Duplex Unit AD3000 D369 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT 1 2 1 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 Open the duplex inner guide unit A 3 Duplex outer guide B x 1 ...

Page 992: ...Component D369 6 SM 4 Duplex entrance sensor bracket C x 1 x 1 5 Duplex entrance sensor D hooks 1 2 2 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 Paper guide unit By pass Tray 3 Duplex exit sensor bracket A x 2 ...

Page 993: ... Component SM 7 D369 Duplex Unit AD3000 D369 4 Duplex exit sensor B hooks 1 2 3 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 Right door cover Right Door Cover 3 Duplex transport motor bracket A x 3 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 994: ...Electrical Component D369 8 SM 4 Duplex transport motor B x 2 ...

Page 995: ...it Duplex Unit 2 By pass Tray By pass Tray 3 Right door cover Right Door Cover 4 Release the hook A 5 Sensor base B x 1 6 Paper end sensor bypass C hooks 1 3 2 BY PASS FEED ROLLER 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 By pass Tray By pass Tray 3 Right door cover Right Door Cover 4 Sensor base Paper End Sensor Bypass ...

Page 996: ... PAD 1 Duplex unit Duplex Unit 2 By pass Tray By pass Tray 3 Right door cover Right Door Cover 4 By pass feed roller By pass Feed Roller 5 By pass transport motor bracket By pass Transport Motor 6 By pass feed gear A x 1 bushing x 1 7 By pass feed shaft B x 1 bushing x 1 ...

Page 997: ...By pass Unit SM 11 D369 Duplex Unit AD3000 D369 8 By pass tray bar C x 4 x 1 x 1 9 Paper guide D x 2 1 Separation pad E hook x 2 spring x 1 ...

Page 998: ... Duplex transport roller 2 6 Duplex exit sensor 7 Duplex transport roller 3 8 Standard tray 9 Inverter tray To print on the second side the paper exit inverter roller inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex unit The duplex unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section When both sides have been printed the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out to the stan...

Page 999: ...r A drives the following Paper exit inverter roller B The duplex bypass motor C drives the following Duplex transport roller 1 D Duplex transport roller 2 E Duplex transport roller 3 F The duplex entrance sensor G and duplex exit sensor H control the interleave movement and detect paper jams ...

Page 1000: ...ack system for duplex printing The drawing above right shows the paper feed for duplex printing The junction gate solenoid which is in the interchange unit opens or closes the junction gate A If the duplex mode is selected the junction gate closes the exit path and opens the duplex inverter path ...

Page 1001: ...RATION Up to A4 LT 81 2 x 11 LEF There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time The interleave method is used The drawing above shows the paper movement with the interleave method for three sheets of paper The printing is done as follows ...

Page 1002: ... two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time The interleave method is used For sheets longer than 400 mm there is no interleaving The drawing above shows the paper movement with the interleave method for two sheets of paper The printing is done as follows ...

Page 1003: ...BYPASS TRAY BY3000 D370 ...

Page 1004: ......

Page 1005: ...1 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3 1 2 1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BYPASS 3 1 2 2 PAPER END SENSOR BYPASS 4 1 2 3 BY PASS TRAY MOTOR 5 1 3 FEED 6 1 3 1 BY PASS FEED ROLLER 6 1 3 2 SEPARATION PAD 6 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 8 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 8 2 2 OVERVIEW 9 2 2 1 BASIC OPERATION 9 2 2 2 BY PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION 9 ...

Page 1006: ......

Page 1007: ...DURE SAFETY Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 1008: ......

Page 1009: ... 4 x 2 Duplex Model 1 Remove the connector cover x 1 2 Disconnect the cable 3 Release the front and rear link x 1 4 Remove the duplex unit 5 Remove the inner rear cover x 2 6 Remove the paper guide unit 7 Disconnect the by pass tray cable x 1 8 Remove the front and rear pins x 1 each 9 By pass tray unit 1 1 2 BY PASS TRAY 1 By pass tray unit By pass Tray Unit ...

Page 1010: ...Tray D370 2 SM 2 Remove the pins A x 1 each 3 By pass tray B x 1 ...

Page 1011: ...ay BY3000 D370 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1 2 1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BYPASS 1 By pass tray unit By pass Tray Unit 2 By pass tray Paper Tray 3 Pin A x 1 4 Pin cover B 5 By pass tray top cover C 6 Paper size sensor bypass D hook x 1 ground cable x 1 ...

Page 1012: ...ch faces the projection A of the left side fence bar 3 Reassemble the copier 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 5 Check this switch operation with SP5803 030 By pass paper size Input Check Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A3 SEF 10010000 B5 SEF 11100000 B4 SEF 11010000 B6 SEF 00110000 A4 SEF 11000000 A6 SEF 10110000 1 2 2 PAPER END SENSOR BYPASS 1 By pass tray unit...

Page 1013: ...ay BY3000 D370 2 By pass feed unit A x 4 x 1 x 2 3 Sensor base B x 1 hooks 4 Paper end sensor bypass C hooks 1 2 3 BY PASS TRAY MOTOR 1 By pass tray unit By pass Tray Unit 2 By pass feed unit Paper End Sensor Bypass 3 By pass tray motor A x 2 ...

Page 1014: ...paper feed unit Paper End Sensor Bypass 3 Sensor base Paper End Sensor Bypass 4 By pass feed roller A 1 3 2 SEPARATION PAD 1 By pass tray unit By pass Tray Unit 2 By pass paper feed unit Paper End Sensor Bypass 3 By pass tray motor bracket A x 3 4 Gear B x 2 bushing x 1 5 Paper guide unit C x 2 x 1 ...

Page 1015: ...Feed SM 7 D370 Bypass Tray BY3000 D370 6 Separation pad D spring x 1 ...

Page 1016: ... pass Tray Motor Drives the paper feed roller 2 Paper End Sensor Bypass Informs the copier printer when the by pass tray runs out of paper 3 By pass Feed Roller Feeds paper from the by pass tray 4 Paper Size Sensor Bypass Detects the paper width 5 Separation Pad Separates a sheet of paper from the paper stack on the by pass tray ...

Page 1017: ...ler C via the gear The by pass tray has the separation pad system The spring D under the separation pad E pushes the paper against the feed roller As a result the by pass feed roller C and separation pad E feed the top sheet of paper stack on the by pass tray 2 2 2 BY PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION There are two paper side plates A on the by pass tray These connect with the paper size sensor B through ...

Page 1018: ...aper has been placed in the bypass tray by the signal output from the board However the copier cannot determine the paper length from the by pass tray hardware Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A3 SEF 10010000 B5 SEF 11100000 B4 SEF 11010000 B6 SEF 00110000 A4 SEF 11000000 A6 SEF 10110000 ...

Page 1019: ...INTERCHANGE UNIT TYPE 3350 D371 ...

Page 1020: ......

Page 1021: ... 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT 1 1 1 1 INTERCHANGE MOTOR 1 1 1 2 JUNCTION GATE JAM SENSOR 2 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 3 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 4 2 2 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 5 ...

Page 1022: ......

Page 1023: ...DURE SAFETY Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring Clamp ...

Page 1024: ......

Page 1025: ... 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT 1 1 1 INTERCHANGE MOTOR 1 Open the right cover A or right door if the duplex unit is installed 2 Right upper cover B x 3 3 Front right cover C hook 4 Interchange unit D x 2 x 2 or 3 if 1 bin unit is installed ...

Page 1026: ...371 2 SM 5 Interchange motor bracket E x 3 gear x 1 timing belt x 1 6 Interchange motor F x 2 1 1 2 JUNCTION GATE JAM SENSOR 1 Interchange unit Interchange Motor 2 Sensor bracket A x 1 3 Junction gate jam sensor B x 1 hooks ...

Page 1027: ...1 Interchange Unit Type 3350 D371 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Junction Gate Solenoid 2 Paper Exit Inverter Roller 3 Junction Gate Jam Sensor 4 Paper Transport Roller ...

Page 1028: ...m Sensor The interchange motor drives the paper exit inverter roller and paper transport roller through the gears and timing belt This motor exits paper to the 1 bin tray if it is installed and 1 bin tray is selected as an output location However this motor also transports paper to the duplex path if the duplex unit is installed and the machine gets a duplex job ...

Page 1029: ...e Exit Tray or Bridge Unit The exit junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is directed to the copier exit unit To the 1 bin Tray The junction gate solenoid turns on The paper is directed to the 1 bin tray To the Duplex Unit The junction gate solenoid turns on When the junction gate jam sensor C detects a trailing edge of a sheet of paper the machine stops the paper exit inverter roller D a...

Page 1030: ......

Page 1031: ...500 SHEET FINISHER SR3050 D372 ...

Page 1032: ......

Page 1033: ...OR 8 1 3 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR 8 1 3 3 POSITIONING ROLLER ARM MOTOR 9 1 3 4 STAPLER MOVEMENT MOTOR 10 1 3 5 FRONT FENCE MOTOR 11 1 3 6 FEED OUT BELT MOTOR REAR FENCE MOTOR 11 1 4 BOARDS 13 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD 13 1 5 OTHERS 14 1 5 1 STAPLER 14 1 5 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 14 2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 16 2 1 OVERVIEW 16 2 1 1 IMPORTANT PARTS 16 2 1 2 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 17 2 1 3 GENERAL OPERATION 17 2 1 ...

Page 1034: ...LER MOVEMENT MOTOR INITIALIZATION 35 2 4 3 STAPLER ERRORS 36 2 5 PAPER OUTPUT 37 2 5 1 OVERVIEW 37 2 5 2 FEED OUT 40 2 5 3 FEED OUT BELT INITIALIZATION 41 2 5 4 FEED OUT BELT ERRORS 41 2 5 5 FEED OUT EXTENSION 42 2 6 TRAY OPERATION 44 2 6 1 OVERVIEW 44 2 6 2 TRAY LIFT CONTROL 45 2 6 3 TRAY INITIALIZATION 48 2 6 4 TRAY LIFT ERRORS 49 2 7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 51 2 7 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 51 2 7 2 SUMM...

Page 1035: ...eted 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with...

Page 1036: ...ions and heat build up The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions CONVENTIONS AND TRADEMARKS CONVENTIONS Symbol What it means Core Tech Manual Screw Connector E ring C ring Clamp FFC Flexible Film Connector ...

Page 1037: ... prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trade...

Page 1038: ......

Page 1039: ... must be removed from the machine for these procedures The front and rear covers cannot be removed while the finisher is attached to the side of the machine 1 Disconnect the finisher I F cable A on the left side of the machine 2 Remove the lock plate B x1 3 Press the spring release C toward the rear of the finisher then lift the finisher off its center post ...

Page 1040: ...oor A 2 Remove the front cover B x2 Release tab C after removing the screws then raise the bottom of the front cover to remove it 1 1 3 REAR COVER Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine 1 Remove the rear cover A x2 Release tab B after removing the screws then raise the bottom of the rear cover to remove it ...

Page 1041: ... Procedures SM 3 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 1 1 4 TRANSPORT UNIT Preparation Remove Front cover Rear cover 1 Remove the paper output tray A x2 2 Remove the left top cover A x2 3 Remove the tray support B x2 ...

Page 1042: ...Common Procedures D372 4 SM 4 Remove the screws of the end fence A x3 5 Release tabs B and C 6 Remove the end fence 7 Remove the main board A x 14 x4 ...

Page 1043: ...Common Procedures SM 5 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 8 Remove the positioning roller arm motor bracket A x2 9 Remove the transport unit A x3 Rear x2 Front ...

Page 1044: ... ENTRANCE SENSOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine 1 Remove the sensor bracket A x1 2 Disconnect the entrance sensor B Pawls x4 x1 1 2 2 PAPER SENSOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher ...

Page 1045: ...Sensors SM 7 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the transport unit 1 Disconnect the sensor A x1 Pawls x3 x1 ...

Page 1046: ... Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the front cover 1 Remove the tray lift motor A x2 x1 1 3 2 TRANSPORT MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover ...

Page 1047: ...ming belt is set correctly Rotate the motor drive gear by hand and confirm that these rollers are turning 1 entrance roller 2 positioning roller and 3 return rollers The return rollers are the two small sponge rollers below the positioning roller 1 3 3 POSITIONING ROLLER ARM MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover 1 Remove th...

Page 1048: ...LER MOVEMENT MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the main board A x 14 x4 2 Remove the stapler movement motor A x2 x1 3 Remove the bracket B x2 ...

Page 1049: ... finisher from the side of the machine Remove the transport unit 1 Remove the front fence motor A x1 x2 x1 1 3 6 FEED OUT BELT MOTOR REAR FENCE MOTOR Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the transport unit 1 Remove the feed out belt motor mount A x2 2 Remove ...

Page 1050: ...Motors D372 12 SM B 1st bracket x2 C 2nd bracket x2 D 3rd bracket 3 Remove the rear fence motor E x2 x1 ...

Page 1051: ...ds SM 13 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 1 4 BOARDS 1 4 1 MAIN BOARD Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the main board A x14 x4 ...

Page 1052: ... 5 OTHERS 1 5 1 STAPLER Preparation Remove the front cover 1 Remove the stapler A x1 x2 1 5 2 POSITIONING ROLLER Preparation Disconnect the finisher Remove the finisher from the side of the machine Remove the front cover ...

Page 1053: ...heet Finisher D372 Remove the rear cover 1 Remove the left top cover A x2 2 Rotate drive gear B of the positioning roller arm motor to raise the positioning roller to its highest position 3 Remove the positioning roller C x1 ...

Page 1054: ...x2 10 Bottom Fences 2 Tray Upper Limit Switch 11 Feed out Belt 3 Positioning Roller 12 Feed out Belt Pawls x2 4 Exit Roller 13 Tray Lift Motor 5 Return Roller 14 End Fence 6 Entrance Roller 15 Paper Sensor 7 Entrance Sensor 16 Output Tray 8 Mobile Fence x1 17 Tray Extension Middle 9 Stapler 18 Tray Extension End ...

Page 1055: ...ls see the other sections of this manual First the operator pulls out the tray extension 1 and selects the paper size and operation mode for the job Normal Shift or Stapling Paper Transport The entrance sensor 2 detects the paper when it enters the finisher The entrance rollers 3 feed the paper to the exit rollers 4 The paper falls between the front and side fences 5 ...

Page 1056: ...e edge depressor solenoid 12 switches on and retracts the edge depressors just before the feed out belt pawls push the stack out The two stack edge depressors 13 lightly push down on the trailing edge of the stack to keep it down against the end fence The edge depressors are attached to the paper height sensor so this action checks if it is necessary to move the tray up or down Tray Operation The ...

Page 1057: ...tracts the edge depressors and then switches off to allow the depressors to lower 3 The tray lift motor switches on lowers the tray slightly raises it to the start position and switches off 4 The front and side fence motors switch on and off to position both side fences at their home positions both retracted 5 The positioning roller arm motor switches on and off to bring the positioning roller to ...

Page 1058: ...Overview D372 20 SM No What Happens sure that the stapler is at its home position ...

Page 1059: ... Edge Depressors 9 Entrance Sensor 2 Positioning Roller 10 Mobile Fence 3 Exit Roller 11 Bottom Fences x2 4 Return Rollers 12 Feed Out Belts x2 5 Entrance Roller 13 Feed Out Belt Pawls x2 6 Bridge Unit Copier 14 End Fence 7 Transport Roller Main Machine 15 Output Tray 8 Exit Roller Main Machine ...

Page 1060: ... rollers in the unit The entrance rollers 2 take the paper from the copier and feed it to the exit rollers 3 where the paper drops onto the jogging and stapling tray The return rollers 4 rotate in the opposite direction and feed each sheet against the bottom fences inside the finisher The positioning roller described in the next section assists the return rollers in feeding each sheet against the ...

Page 1061: ...red The transport motor slows down to match the speed of the main machine s exit roller At the same time the positioning roller motor accelerates briefly lowers the positioning roller arm and then stops When the positioning roller touches the paper The positioning roller driven by the transport roller continues to rotate The positioning roller and the smaller two sponge rollers rotating against th...

Page 1062: ... transport motor speed accelerates to 600 mm s after the leading edge of the sheet passes the entrance sensor and feeds 21 5 mm After the trailing edge goes 96 mm past the entrance sensor the transport motor slows the line speed to 200 mm s for paper shorter than 300 mm or to 300 mm s for paper longer than 300 mm After the paper sensor detects that the trailing has fed 45 mm past the exit roller t...

Page 1063: ... on and rotates the positioning roller to home position The positioning roller arm motor switches on lowers the positioning roller arm raises the positioning roller to the up position and then stops when the actuator of the positioning roller HP sensor switches off the sensor If the HP sensor does not go OFF within the prescribed time this indicates an error If the HP sensor does not go ON after t...

Page 1064: ...d backward The diagram above shows the positions of the side fences 1 When the copier exit sensor signals that that a sheet of paper has been sent from the copier to the finisher both fence motors switch on and move the side fences to the start position The start position for each fence is set wider than the paper size selected for the job 15 mm wider than the paper for shift mode 7 mm wider than ...

Page 1065: ...mode the stack is output regardless of whether the document has finished printing or not In stapling mode the side fence that jogs the side of the stack stops and waits for stapling to end After stapling the side fence motor switches on and retracts the side fence 0 5 mm If the stack is centered both fences retract 0 25 mm After the stack is output by the feed out belt the side fence motors switch...

Page 1066: ...job At the end of the job every set is stacked on the output tray neatly offset by 30 mm making them easy to separate Normal Non Shift Mode The diagram above illustrates the operation of the side fences in normal non shift mode The operation is slightly different depending on the paper size There are three cases Standard paper sizes other than wide or small paper Wide paper sizes 133 to 147 mm Sma...

Page 1067: ... on the type of stapling selected for the job One staple front oblique front straight rear oblique rear straight Two staples at two positions Staple Mode 1 Staple In the One Staple Mode one side fence jogs one side of the stack The diagram above illustrates the operation of the side fences for stapling at one position front oblique front straight rear oblique or rear straight Every time a sheet A ...

Page 1068: ...itialization is not executed if the paper sensor on the stapling tray detects paper present Fence HP Sensor OFF The fence motor switches on until the HP sensor goes ON advances 0 25 mm then switches OFF This is the home position Fence HP sensor ON The fence motor drives the fence toward the center until the HP sensor goes OFF advances 15 mm then switches off The motor switches ON again advances th...

Page 1069: ... top cover or the stapler door triggers the initial check and restores normal operation if no problems are detected At the second occurrence after an SC code is issued cycling the main machine off on may restore full operation if no problems are detected 2 3 5 SIDE FENCE OPERATION ADJUSTMENT The distance between the front and rear side fences can be adjusted with DIP SW100 The DIP SW adjustment is...

Page 1070: ...ustment mm ON ON OFF OFF 2 0 ON OFF ON ON 1 5 ON OFF ON OFF 1 0 ON OFF OFF ON 0 5 ON OFF OFF OFF 0 0 OFF ON ON ON 3 5 OFF ON ON OFF 3 0 OFF ON OFF ON 2 5 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 0 OFF OFF ON ON 1 5 OFF OFF ON OFF 1 0 OFF OFF OFF ON 0 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 0 ...

Page 1071: ... Rail 6 Trip Plate Center 3 Driver Gear Timing Belt 7 Trip Plate Front 4 Stapler Movement Motor 8 Stapler HP Sensor The illustration below shows how the stapler moves during each stapling mode When the plate on the bottom of the stapler unit strikes a trip plate this swivels the stapler unit from straight to oblique or vice versa ...

Page 1072: ...Stapling D372 34 SM Staple Positions Front Oblique Stapling 1 Staple Front Straight Stapling 1 Staple Rear Straight Stapling 1 Staple 2 Staples Rear then Front ...

Page 1073: ... feed the staples to the clincher 2 that performs the stapling The pressure of the plunger 11 feeds the next staple for firing A staple supply pawl below the staple sheet moves to the front and back to assist in staple supply The plunger feeds only one staple at a time but the staple supply pawl can feed up to 10 staples 2 4 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT MOTOR INITIALIZATION Initialization of the stapler uni...

Page 1074: ...me position the stapler HP sensor does not go ON even after the stapler movement motor has been on long enough to move the stapler into the home position Stapler is out of staples At power on if staples are not detected in the stapler the staple detection sequence executes up to 10 times until staples present is detected If staples cannot be detected after 10 attempts then the staples out alert is...

Page 1075: ...elts 3 and 4 The rear pawl 5 and front pawl 6 attached to the rear and front belts push the stack out of the finisher after stapling The feed out belt motor also drives the timing belt and shaft 7 that rotates the mobile fence cam 8 The mobile fence follower 9 converts the rotary movement of the cam to rectilinear movement left to right and transmits this movement via the link slider 10 to the mob...

Page 1076: ...edge of each sheet against these fences When the stack is ready to be moved to the output tray the mobile fence 6 pushes the stack to the right The rear pawl 4 and front pawl 5 mounted on the rear and front feed out belts swing up from below and push the stack onto the tray The mobile fence 6 returns to its home position between the stationary bottom fences Feed Out Mechanism Right and Front View ...

Page 1077: ...he front and rear pawls 5 and 6 behind the stack so they can push the stack out of the finisher In the right illustration after stack output The mobile fence driven by its cam follower and lever below moved from its home position 7 to 8 to start pushing the stack out of the finisher The feed out belt pawls pushed the stack out of the finisher then stopped at their home positions 9 A long spring pu...

Page 1078: ... ready to be output The output belt pawls are at their home positions A The mobile fence B is at its home position between the front and rear bottom fences C The mobile fence pushes the stack to the right and stops The feed out belt pawls rapidly swing up and push the stack toward the output tray The feed out belt pawls push the stack onto the output tray A spring not shown retracts the mobile fen...

Page 1079: ...nter clockwise until the HP goes ON and then stops This is the home position 2 5 4 FEED OUT BELT ERRORS A feed out belt error can occur in two cases The feed out belt HP sensor does not go OFF even after the motor has started The feed out belt does not go ON after the feed out belt motor has started at power on and the finisher is ready to operate Stapler out of staples When an error occurs the fe...

Page 1080: ...trailing edges of the stacks are catching on the end fence and not falling straight down onto the tray When the feed out belt pawls A push a stack of paper B onto the tray C a bend D forms at the trailing edge With some types of paper especially larger paper such as A3 this bend can cause the edge of the stack to catch on the end fence E when it falls into the tray ...

Page 1081: ...by 6 mm the distance that the pawls must push the trailing edge of the stack The extra 6 mm forces the edge of the stack to bend more so it will snap down with more force and not catch on the end fence This prevents the trailing edge of the stack B from catching on the end fence when it falls into the tray ...

Page 1082: ...es and lowers the output tray 2 The edge depressors 3 lightly press down on the trailing edges of stacks already on the tray to keep them down against the end fence When the actuator on the bottom of the rear rail switches the tray full sensor 4 ON this means that the tray is at its lowest point and the tray is full If the tray becomes overloaded the top of the stack pushes up the spring loaded pu...

Page 1083: ...he tray lift motor switches on 300 ms for shift mode 500 ms for stapling mode lowers the output tray stops then waits to receive the stack Just before a stack falls onto the output tray the edge depressor solenoid 3 switches ON and retracts the edge depressors 1 away from the top of the stack already on the tray so that the next stack can fall freely The feed out belt motor stops immediately after...

Page 1084: ...necessary to move the tray up or down After 200 ms if the paper height sensor is ON the tray lift motor switches ON and raises the tray If the paper height sensor is OFF the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the paper height sensor switches ON pauses for 100 ms switches on again briefly to raise tray to the prescribed position to receive the next stack ...

Page 1085: ...ray and edge depressors operate together Stack Output to Tray The feed out motor switches on and starts to move the feed out belts and pawls pushing the stack toward the output tray The tray motor switches on and lowers the tray until the paper height sensor switches on The motor stops briefly to stop the pawls ...

Page 1086: ...e pawls move to their home positions and stop The sequence starts again with the next finished stack 2 6 3 TRAY INITIALIZATION The following sequence occurs at power on depending on the states of the paper height sensor and tray full sensor The edge depressor solenoid switches from ON to OFF If paper height sensor ON then go to Paper height sensor OFF If the tray full sensor is ON and the paper he...

Page 1087: ...ray lift motor if the tray full sensor or paper height sensors fail The table below shows how the state of the two sensors and one switch signal an error Tray Upper Limit SW Tray Full Sn Paper Hgt Sn What Happens ON OFF OFF Tray Full One or both sensors has failed OFF ON OFF Tray Full OFF ON ON Lift motor starts to raise tray OFF OFF OFF Lift motor starts to lower tray OFF OFF ON Lift motor starts...

Page 1088: ...ift Motor Error is issued To recover from an error At the first occurrence of the error after a paper jam error opening and closing either the top cover or the stapler door triggers the initial check and restores normal operation if no problems are detected At the second occurrence after SC750 is issued cycling the main machine off on may restore full operation if no problems are detected Edge Dep...

Page 1089: ...or 4 Stapler Movement Motor 17 Feed Out Belt Motor 5 Entrance Sensor 18 Output Tray Full Sensor 6 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor 19 Rear Fence Motor 7 Front Fence HP Sensor 20 Positioning Roller HP Sensor 8 Tray Upper Limit Switch 21 Main Board 9 Top Cover Switch 22 Stapler 10 Stapler Door Switch 23 Stapler Motor 11 Stapler HP Sensor 24 Staple Cartridge Set Sensor 12 Tray Lift Motor 25 Stapler Hammer ...

Page 1090: ...M6 Transport Motor Drives all the rollers in the finisher entrance roller positioning roller return rollers exit roller M7 Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the output tray M8 Stapler Motor The motor inside the stapler that drives staple supply and stapling Board PCB1 Main Board Controls operation of the finisher DIP switches can be changed to adjust the positions of the front and rear side fences...

Page 1091: ...als the tray lift motor to lower the tray S5 Positioning Roller HP Sensor Detects the HP of the positioning roller when it is up S6 Rear Fence HP Sensor Detects the HP of the rear fence at the back of the finisher S7 Stapler HP Sensor Detects HP of the stapler at the front of the finisher S8 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor Detects paper on the stapling tray Solenoid SOL Stack Depressor Solenoid When a ...

Page 1092: ...pened or closed SW3 Tray Upper Limit Switch If the tray becomes full the top of the stack will push up a plate that activates this switch and switches off the finisher This is a backup feature that will shut down operation if the tray full sensor or paper height sensor fails with the output tray full Other Stapler Stapler Unit Staples sheets stacked on the stapling tray ...

Page 1093: ...Electrical Components SM 55 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 2 7 3 TIMING CHARTS The first flowchart below is the operational timing chart for shift mode the second chart is for stapling mode Shift Mode ...

Page 1094: ... 2 Remove jammed paper or staple 3 Close the top cover or stapler door 1st Occurrence Jam Error 1 Open top cover or stapler door 2 Remove jammed paper or staple 3 Close the top cover or stapler door 2nd Occurrence SC Code 1 Cycle the machine power off on 2 If this does not solve the problem refer to Section 4 Troubleshooting 3 Look up the SC code in table and do the service procedure ...

Page 1095: ... times the length of the paper size signaled by the main machine Solution 3 Paper in paper path Problem Occurs at power on or after the top cover or stapler door has been closed After the top or stapler cover switch is closed the stapler cover switch goes OFF but the entrance sensor remains ON for longer than 50 ms Solution 4 No paper present Problem Occurs during stapling stapling mode WAIT The p...

Page 1096: ...ide fence motor remained on for 50 pulses to move the fence toward the rear The front side fence HP sensor did not switch from OFF to ON after the front side fence motor remained on for 420 pulses Solution 7 Rear side fence motor error Problem Occurs at power on when the paper moves to the start position in the finisher or in standby mode The rear side fence HP sensor did not switch from ON to OFF...

Page 1097: ... after the stapler movement motor ran for 5600 pulses Solution 10 Stapler motor error Problem Occurs during staple supply to the stapler The stapler operation stapling did not end after 600 ms A staple jam can also cause this error 11 Tray lift motor error Problem Occurs at initialization after return to standby or during feed out belt operation The paper height sensor did not go OFF after the tra...

Page 1098: ...top cover 16 Stapler cover open Problem The stapler cover remained open longer than 2 ms Solution Close the stapler cover 17 Tray upper limit switch is ON Problem The tray upper limit switch remained on longer than 2 ms Solution Before determining that an error has occurred Lower the safety lever Cycle the machine power off on 18 System error Problem An abnormal condition was detected and existed ...

Page 1099: ...Electrical Components SM 61 D372 500 Sheet Finisher D372 No Error Problem Solution Solution DFU 20 Abnormal data transfer Problem A problem has been detected at ASAP during data transmission Solution ...

Page 1100: ...K Up to 253 g m2 220K without shift Stapling Stack Height for Stapling 50 sheets A4 LT and smaller 30 sheets B4 LG and larger Size A3 SEF to B5 SEF can be mixed if same width Stack Thickness 64g m2 45 K to 157 g m 135 K Stapling Positions Front Oblique 1 Front Parallel 1 Rear Oblique 1 Rear Parallel 1 2 locations Output Tray Capacity Non staple Mode 500 sheets A4 LT and smaller Staple Mode 250 she...

Page 1101: ...0 Sheets 25 to 8 A4 B5 LT SEF 2 to 9 Sheets 55 to 27 10 to 30 Sheets 25 to 8 A3 B4 DLT LG Stacking Non Stapling Mode Vertical 15 mm or less Horizontal 15 mm or less Jogging Precision 2 to 30 Sheets 2 mm 31 to 50 Sheets 3 mm Dimensions w x d x h 396 x 551 x 276 mm 15 6 x 21 7 x 10 9 in Weight 12 kg 26 4 lb ...

Page 1102: ......

Page 1103: ...PRINTER SCANNER OPTION D383 ...

Page 1104: ......

Page 1105: ...TROLLER OPTIONS 14 1 3 1 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD B679 14 1 3 2 IEEE 802 11A G D377 15 1 3 3 BLUETOOTH UNIT B826 19 1 3 4 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT D383 20 1 3 5 GIGABIT ETHERNET G831 1 1 4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 2 2 SERVICE TABLES 3 2 1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES 3 2 2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLES 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS 7 3 1 SPECIFICATIONS 7 3 1 1 PRINTER CONTROLLER GENERAL 7 3 1 2 USB SPECIFICATIONS 8 3 1 3 IEEE 802...

Page 1106: ......

Page 1107: ... inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 To prevent a fire or explosion keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with the spec...

Page 1108: ... and heat build up The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Conventions and Trademarks CONVENTIONS Symbol What it means Core Tech Manual Screw Connector E ring C ring Harness clamp FFC Flexible Film Connec...

Page 1109: ...e injury or damage to the machine or other property Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countri...

Page 1110: ... Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks ...

Page 1111: ... Scanner Unit on the D018 D020 Printer Scanner Unit 256 MB memory These items are available as options for the Monochrome Scanner Unit D017 D019 1 1 1 INTERFACE BOARD SD CARD SLOTS The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card slots Only one interface board option can be installed Only two SD cards are available for applications and maintenance ...

Page 1112: ...th the exception of the HDD Encryption unit or VM SD card should be installed in Slot 1 If more than one application is to be used move the applications to the same SD card with SP5873 SD Card Slot 2 For options provided on SD cards and servicing The HDD Encryption unit SD card and VM card must be installed in Slot 2 USB B Built in for connection of USB devices USB 2 0 Ethernet Standard LAN connec...

Page 1113: ...rds Two SD card slots are available The VM application SD card and HDD Encryption Unit SD Card must be installed in Slot 2 lower Other applications should be installed in Slot 1 upper If more than one application is required move the applications onto one SD card with SP5873 1 Due to copyright restrictions the PostScript Unit D383 cannot be moved to another SD card However other applications can b...

Page 1114: ...oller Board Slots D383 4 SM No SD Card Appliacations D383 Printer Unit Type 3350 D383 D383 Printer Scanner Unit Type 3350 D383 D383 RPCS Printer Unit Type 3350 D383 D383 Scanner Enhance Option Type 3350 D383 ...

Page 1115: ... Unit Type 3350 For customers who require only basic copying and printing and the RPCS printer language The HDD is not required but the 256 MB memory must be installed Printer Unit Type 3350 For customers who do not require the extended scanning features but need more printing capability both RPCS and PCL printer languages are provided The 256 MB memory is required Printer Scanner Unit Type 3350 F...

Page 1116: ...t or the Printer Scanner Unit Enhance Options There are two enhance options Printer Enhance Option Type 3350 Updates the RPCS unit by adding PCL Scanner Enhance Option Type 3350 Updates the RPCS unit or Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning features 1 2 2 KIT CONTENTS Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and the illustration on the next page This is a common lis...

Page 1117: ...ovided in the kits However one memory unit is required for the installation of every print unit 2 The HDD can be installed anytime as a separate option If an HDD unit has already been installed it does not need to be replaced with the HDD unit from the Printer Enhance Option Printer Unit or Printer Scanner Unit kit 3 The number of keytops provided varies Keytops Kit Copy Document Server Printer Sc...

Page 1118: ...D383 8 SM 1 2 3 PRINTER PRINTER SCANNER UNIT INSTALLATION Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the application cover A x1 2 Remove the controller board B x3 3 Install the 256 MB memory A ...

Page 1119: ... Insert the SD card A in SD card Slot 1 upper 7 Cycle the machine power off on 8 Format the HDD with SP5832 1 9 Do SP5853 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk 10 Do SP5846 040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board 11 Do SP5846 041 to let the user get access to the address book 12 Reattach the application cover x1 ...

Page 1120: ...nection 15 Connect the USB cable to the USB connection 16 Remove the 1st 2nd 4th and 5th blank key tops The 3rd blank keytop from the top is reserved for the Fax keytop Do not remove it at this time 17 Replace the blank keytops with the keytops received in the kit from top to bottom 1st Copy 2nd Document Server 4th Printer ...

Page 1121: ...ine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine power is turned on with the new HDD installed the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it on the new HDD However only the system administrator can use the new address book on the HDD at this time If you do SP5846 41 immediately after power on then all users can use the address book It is not necessary to for...

Page 1122: ...Printer Unit SD card is in SD card the upper slot 3 Put the empty SD card Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option D383 in the lower slot 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Go into the SP mode and do SP5873 2 Undo Exec 6 Obey messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure 7 Turn the main switch off 8 Remove the restored SD card from the lower slot 9 Turn the main switch on 10 Go into t...

Page 1123: ... destination card should have the largest amount of space available so it can hold as many other applications as possible The VM Card can be neither merged nor moved to another SD card This card must be installed in Slot 2 lower SD Card Options SD Card Size Module Size Printer Scanner Unit Type 3350 32 MB 9 3 MB RPCS Printer Unit Type 3350 32 MB 6 3 MB Printer Unit Type 3350 32 MB 8 3 MB Printer E...

Page 1124: ... the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the application cover x1 2 Remove the cover A of the board slot x1 3 Install the interface board B x2 knob screws Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 4 Reattach the application cover x1 If the 500 Sheet Finisher is installed remove it before you attach the par...

Page 1125: ... Interface Board 1 2 Antenna Cables 2 3 Antenna Clamps 8 Installation Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the plastic application cover x1 2 Remove the cover A of the board slot x1 3 Insert the interface card B as shown above Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 1 Look at the markings on ...

Page 1126: ...assure reliable data sending and receiving Antenna 1 must be installed on the front left corner of the machine 2 Remove the seals from of the cable clamps and attach them to the left side of the machine as shown above 3 Attach Antenna 1 A to the left front corner of the machine The core on the Antenna 1 cable is black 4 Set the cable of Antenna 1 in the clamps and close them 5 Remove the seals fro...

Page 1127: ...nel You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 to 14 default 11 The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 8 Do the WEP Encryption Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys ...

Page 1128: ...LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802 11b SP No Name Function 5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting WEP Key U...

Page 1129: ...urn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the plastic application cover x1 2 Remove the cover A of board slot x1 3 Attach the interface board B to the controller board x2 knob screws Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob screws Do not tighten manually because this can disconnect the board 4 Install the Bluetooth card C in the slot in the Bluetooth unit 5 Insert th...

Page 1130: ...ist No Description Quantity 1 PostScript 3 Emulation SD Card D383 1 2 Decal 1 Installation Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord 1 Remove the plastic application cover A x1 2 Insert the SD card B into Slot 1 upper slot 3 Reattach the plastic application cover x1 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal to the front cover ...

Page 1131: ... Ethernet G381 1 2 Ferrite Core 1 Installation 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the plastic application cover x1 3 Remove the board cover A x 2 4 Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board B into the slot and fasten it with the screws 5 Switch the machine on 6 Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2 0 User Tools Printer Features List Test Print Config...

Page 1132: ...r cord and turn on the main switch 2 Go into the printer user mode and print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page The same data can also be printed with printer SP1 004 Print Summary All installed options are listed in the System Reference column ...

Page 1133: ...00H 007 Bit SW 7 00H 1001 008 Bit SW 8 00H Adjusts the bit switch settings Note These bit switches are currently not used SP Number Name Function Setting Clear setting 001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode 002 Clear CSS Counter DFU 1003 003 Delete Program DFU 1004 Print Summary Prints the printer summary sheet 1005 Display Version Display...

Page 1134: ...5 156 PDF 162 PS 151 RTIFF 157 BMLinks 163 RPDL 152 PCL 156 PICTBRIDGE 164 R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180 R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181 RPGL 155 MSIS OPT 161 FONT2 182 7910 FONT3 183 7911 PDL Version Information Returns a text string for the version RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162 PS 151 RTIFF 157 BMLinks 163 RPDL 152 PCL 156 PICTBRIDGE 164 R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180 R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181 RPGL 155 MSIS OPT...

Page 1135: ...Using TWAIN Sets the system not to use the network TWAIN scanner driver 0 Not forbidden can use TWAIN 1 Forbid using TWAIN driver SP Number Name Function Setting Compression level grayscale 2021 These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel Range 5 lowest ratio to 95 highest ratio 2021 1 Level 3 Middle...

Page 1136: ...Scanner Service Tables D383 6 SM Compression Notch Assignment ...

Page 1137: ...dent Fonts PCL TrueType 10 Intellifont 35 International 13 Bitmap 1 PS3 Option fonts PS3 Connectivity Std RJ 45 network port 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 Option IEEE802 11a g g Wireless LAN Bluetooth IEEE1284 Centronics Parallel Gigabit Ethernet Network Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX SMB NetBIOS over TCP IP AppleTalk Auto Switching RAM Maximum MS model 512 MB Resident 256 MB Additional 256 MB CS model 76...

Page 1138: ... Standard applied IEEE802 11a g g Speed Distance 11 Mbps 140 m 153 yd 5 5 Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd Data transmission rates 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd Network protocols TCP IP Apple Talk NetBEUI IPX SPX SMB Bandwidth 2 4GHz divided over 14 channels 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel 3 1 4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1 1 Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps Pr...

Page 1139: ...k Delivery Scanner A4 LEF Text 200 dpi MH Compression Available scanning Resolution Range 100 to 1200 dpi when used as a Network TWAIN scanner 100 200 300 400 600 dpi when used as a network delivery scanner Scan to Folder Scan to Email or Document Server storage Grayscales 8 bits pixel Interface Ethernet 10 100BASE TX Wireless LAN 802 11a g g Compression Method MH MR MMR Binary Picture Processing ...

Page 1140: ...MIPS platforms The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers except for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista which uses Microsoft PS A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver Utility Software Software Description Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 Win 95 98 Me NT4 2000 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer Smart Device Monitor for Admin Win 95 98 Me NT4 200...

Page 1141: ...k and LAN Fax Cover Sheet Editor PS Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients Acrobat Reader A utility that allows reading PDF files Scanner The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD ROM Scanner Driver Network Twain Driver for Win95 98 Me NT4 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista Scanner Utilities DeskTopBinder Lite for 2000 XP...

Page 1142: ......

Page 1143: ...INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3010 D385 ...

Page 1144: ......

Page 1145: ...TION DESCRIPTIONS 3 2 1 BASIC OPERATION 3 2 2 PRIMARY MECHANISMS 4 2 2 1 TRAY SHIFT 4 2 2 2 HALF TURN DETECTION 5 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 6 3 1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT 6 3 1 1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL 6 3 1 2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT 6 3 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT 7 3 2 1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR 7 3 2 2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR 7 ...

Page 1146: ......

Page 1147: ...hwise to A3 HLT lengthwise to DLT Non standard Size Paper Width 90 297 mm Paper Length 148 432 mm Paper Weight 60 105 g m 16 28 lbs Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m 20 lbs B4 or larger 250 sheets 80 g m 20 lbs A4 or smaller Power Source 5 VDC 24 VDC from the copier Power Consumption 17 W Weight 1 1 kg Size W x D x H 530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm ...

Page 1148: ...COMPONENT LAYOUT D385 2 SM 1 2 COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Half Turn Sensor 2 Tray Cover 3 Slip Disc 4 Tray Motor 5 Driver PCB B459D101 WMF B459D102 WMF 1 2 3 4 1 4 5 ...

Page 1149: ...ILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2 1 BASIC OPERATION The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray From the left right movement of the tray cover A the piles of copies are offset into two positions slightly overlapping one another B459D500 WMF A ...

Page 1150: ...rotational center of the disc However there is an off centered white square attached to the top surface of the disc When the tray cover is attached to the unit this square fits into a groove D approximately equal to its width that runs lengthwise along the underside of the tray When the motor is running the disc rotation causes the off centered white square to change position Since the square only...

Page 1151: ... edge of the disc opposite the tray motor The sensor is positioned so that the rim of the disc passes between the LED and photo diode when the disc turns While the motor B is rotating the disc and moving the tray cover the disc rim is not between the diode and LED After the disc has turned its maximum 180 the rim passes between these two parts and blocks the signal to the LED stopping the motor Th...

Page 1152: ... TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT NOTE The right side of the tray cover should be attached first 1 Fit the pawls C just below the cover fin around the thin bar D on the shift tray 2 Align the square E so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover 3 Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls B into place B459R101 WMF A ...

Page 1153: ...SH3010 D385 3 2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT 3 2 1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the slip disc A 2 Remove the tray motor B from the motor holder 1 connector 3 2 2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR 1 Remove the half turn sensor C 1 connector B459R102 WMF A B C ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 2550B

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 2550B

Brands by name

Popular brands

Ricoh Aficio MP 2550B, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Aficio MP 2550B

Reviews:

Related manuals for Aficio MP 2550B

Brands by name

Popular brands